JP6194546B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a spinning machine (slot machine), a ball game machine (pachinko machine), and the like.

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).

  In such a game stand, a movable body is provided on the game board in order to improve the fun of the game as much as possible (see, for example, Patent Document 1), and the front surface covers the game board so as to be visible from the front side. A frame door provided with a movable body is also known.

  In addition, a slot machine is also known in which a movable body is provided on the door body, and a movable body is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device inside the door body, the lamp, and the interior of the decorative panel.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the movable means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in movable means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A door,
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The movable means is a means provided on the door body,
When the power is turned on, the movable unit is configured to perform a series of operations,
Even if the door body is opened during the execution of the series of operations, the series of ongoing operations are continuously performed.
It is characterized by that.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game stand which has the characteristic in the movable means can be provided.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a movable body control process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a movable body interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the door side production movable body control process performed in the 2nd sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the door side production movable body control process at the time of power activation performed by the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 equivalent to one Embodiment of this invention is opened. It is a figure which shows a mode that the front frame door 106 is opened in the 1st modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the front frame door 106 is opened in the 2nd modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the front frame door 106 is opened at the time of power activation in the 3rd modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the power-on operation demonstrated using FIG. In the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 15, it is a figure which shows a mode when a power failure and a power recovery are performed instantaneously while the door side production | generation movable body is operate | moving. (A) is a sectional side view of the whole chance button 700 in the initial position. (B) It is side sectional drawing of the whole chance button 700 in an operation completion position. (C) It is side sectional drawing of the whole chance button 700 when a player depresses the chance button 700 in the operation completion position. (D)-(f) It is the figure which extracted and showed only the lower case 704b and the rotation member 708b in each state of (a)-(c). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray in the state (in operation) where the chance button 700 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between an operation state of a chance button 700, whether a detection result of a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is accepted, and whether an operation reception effect is executable. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 before operation | movement. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 after completion | finish of operation | movement. FIG. 10 is a front view of a chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of a second operation unit 758. (A) It is a sectional side view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position. (B) It is side sectional drawing of the chance button 750 in case the chance button 750 exists in an operation completion position. (C) It is a sectional side view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (B) It is an external perspective view of the periphery of the bet button 132 in a state where the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (in operation). (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which can use the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which cannot use the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button. (C) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 exists in an initial position. (A) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). FIG. 6B is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (C) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the normal production. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 exists in an operation completion position. (G) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). It is the figure which showed an example of various productions. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at a mode that each of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 of the pachinko machine 100 which is one Embodiment of 1st invention was open | released from the front side (player side). It is a disassembled perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the inner frame 104 or the front door 105 is open | released. An example of a case where the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178 in a state where the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102 but the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104. FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 40 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of simultaneous power activation by island equipment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 42 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case the inner frame 104 is open | released during production operation in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 44 in steps. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a first modification of the example shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 in stages. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the example shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45 in steps. The second modified example shown in FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a door opening error occurs and the effect movable body that continues the operation according to the effect data is replaced with the effect movable body that is prohibited from operating. It is. It is a figure which shows an example in case a door body is open | released in the state in which the production | presentation movable body exists in the position which shifted | deviated from the initial position with external force. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the inner frame 104 is open | released during the production | generation operation | movement of the movable body different from what was demonstrated so far as the door side production movable body 2241 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 50 in steps. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a modification example of the example shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 step by step. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 52. A table summarizing main errors other than door opening errors. It is a figure which shows an example in case a 2nd error has generate | occur | produced during production operation in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 55 in steps. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 56 in stages. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 57 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 58 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which prohibits the operation | movement according to the production data of the door side production | generation movable body 2241 even if an error generation timing is before the operation start timing. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of powering off and confirming an electric power supply instantaneously during confirmation operation | movement. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 61 in stages. It is a figure showing the modification of board side production movable body 2242.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a gaming table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. . Note that the enclosed type here means an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and on the front side, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, and a door side effect movable not shown here are movable. The body is attached. A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 700 for changing the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and a chance button 700 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided. The chance button 700 corresponds to an example of a door-side effect movable body. The door-side effect movable body referred to here corresponds to an example of a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. The ball is paid out to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The production device 206 performs the production by operating the board-side production movable body 2242, and details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. Here, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”, and the “principal ball” and “lending ball” are collectively referred to as “ Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and a board-side effect movable body 2242 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. ing. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the board-side effect movable body 2242.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 3 includes an upper arm 2242a and a forearm 2242b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 2242a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm portion 2242b at the position of the elbow is provided. The board-side effect movable body 2242 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Accordingly, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by predetermined control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means). (500)), or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second control unit 400 One unit combined with the sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit (for example, a sub-control unit).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting a detection piece 704b4 provided on the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700, A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 and the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 is read based on a signal from the CPU 404, and the work area of the VRAM 436 is used. A VDP 43 that generates a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 Is connected to the (video display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal to the basic circuit 502 is connected. The effect movable body 224 referred to here includes at least a door side effect movable body provided on the front frame door 106 and a board side effect movable body 2242 provided on the game board 200. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a driving circuit 517 for controlling the driving of the driving unit 708 of the chance button 700, a gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the gaming board lamp 532, and a gaming frame. A game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game lamp 542, and a serial communication control circuit for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 520 is connected.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 5A shows ten types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in a special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. Here, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9v). If it is less than the value, it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start with a predetermined period.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (for example, the main value is not detected) so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (for example, 32.8 ms) and no WDT interruption occurs. Restart once every approximately 2ms, which is the control unit timer interrupt period.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. Here, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the normal figure starting port 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. Here, the counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is acquired from the register for use, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value. Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the first off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (for example, error command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, door open command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  Further, when a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the door opening command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The same applies to a case where a door opening command is directly transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 without going through the payout control unit 600. When the main control unit 300 directly receives the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609, the main control unit 300 transmits a door opening command to the first sub-control unit 400 when the detection signal is transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. Although details will be described later, if the result of this determination is that a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700, or a chance When the pressing operation of the button 700 is valid, processing for preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the chance button 700 while the second sub-control unit 500 controls the driving of the movable unit 704 of the chance button 700. Detection processing and drive control related to the button 700 may be performed by one control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500)).

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309. Is set to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, after performing a movable body control process, it returns to step S703. Although details will be described later, in this movable body control process, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received from the first sub-control section 400, the control command is Perform various corresponding processes.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Movable body control processing>
FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body control process (step S713) of the second sub-control unit main process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body interruption process. is there.

  In step S1001 of the movable body control process shown in FIG. 5A, various received command processes are performed based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400. The received command various processes include, for example, an effect movable body process performed when a command related to the effect movable body 224 is received, and a chance button movable body process performed when a command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received. Can be mentioned.

  Specifically, the effect movable body 224 includes at least the door side effect movable body provided on the front frame door 106 and the board side effect movable body 2242 provided on the game board 200 as described above. In the description using FIG. 10, the door-side effect movable body and the board-side effect movable body 2242 will be described without distinction. In the effect movable body processing, for example, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224 is received. The operation data (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224 included in the control command is stored in the effect movable object drive storage area provided in the RAM 508. . Note that further detailed control processing of the door-side effect movable body will be described later.

  In the chance button movable body process, the control information included in the control command is newly stored in the chance button drive storage area provided in the RAM 508, or the control information stored in the chance button drive storage area is new information. Update the data or discard old information.

  The second sub-control unit 500 executes the movable body interrupt process shown in FIG. 5B at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms) with the above-described timer interrupt as a trigger. In step S1101 of this movable body interruption process, it is determined whether or not control information (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the drive unit 708 is stored in the above-described chance button drive storage area, If the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is output to the drive circuit 517. As a result, the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is driven (details will be described later).

  Further, it is determined whether or not operation data (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224 is stored in the above-described effect movable body drive storage area, and the corresponding operation data is stored. If so, the operation data is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 is driven.

  In step S1102, a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 is input via the sensor circuit 518, and position information of the effect movable body 224 is detected based on the detection signal and stored in the RAM 508. When the sensor is not detected, an initial position return (origin return) process of the effect movable body 224 is performed. Here, the detection process of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 by the detection unit 710 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, but may be performed by this step S1102.

  In step S1103, output information update processing is performed. In the output information update process, a process of updating the operation data of the effect movable body 224 and the control information of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is performed.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of the door-side effect movable body control process executed by the second sub-control unit 500.

  The door-side effect movable body control process shown in FIG. 11 is executed in the received command various processes shown in FIG. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a door opening command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1201), and if not received, proceeds to step S1205, and if received, Based on the position information of the door side effect movable body stored in the RAM 508, it is determined whether or not the current position of the door side effect movable body is the initial position (step S1202). If it is not the initial position, the above-described production movable body drive storage area is rewritten with operation data (for example, closing operation data) for returning to the initial position (step S1203), and this door-side production movable body control process ends. On the other hand, if it is the initial position, standby instruction information indicating standby is set in the above-described production movable body drive storage area (step S1204), and the process ends. In this case, in the output information update process (step S1103) shown in FIG. 10B, the operation data is not updated. In step S1101 in the next movable body interruption process, the drive circuit is related to the door-side effect movable body. Operation data is not transmitted. Note that operation data that maintains the same position as the current position (here, the initial position) may be transmitted.

  In step S1205, which is executed when the door opening command has not been received, the received operation data included in the control command related to the effect movable body 224 is set in the above-described effect movable body drive storage area. End.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the door-side effect movable body control process executed by the second sub-control unit 500 when the power is turned on.

  When the power is turned on, a predetermined voltage is first supplied from the power control unit 660 to the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 determines that the power is turned on when the voltage value from the power control unit 660 exceeds a certain value, and starts the door-side effect movable body control process at the time of power-on shown in FIG. . The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a door opening command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1301), and if not received, the above-described effect movable body drive storage area is stored. Then, operation data (for example, closing operation data) for returning to the initial position is set (step S1302), and the door-side effect movable body control process at the time of power-on is ended. On the other hand, if it has been received, standby instruction information indicating standby is set in the above-described production movable body drive storage area (step S1303), and the process ends. If the execution of step S1101 in the above-described movable body interrupting process is delayed when the power is turned on, the operation data related to the door-side effect movable body may be transmitted to the drive circuit 516 and then terminated. Good.

  The door-side effect movable body control process described above may be executed by the first sub-control unit 400.

  Subsequently, characteristic points of the present invention will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 corresponding to one embodiment of the present invention is opened.

  On the upper part of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 13, a door-side effect movable body 2241 that opens forward (player side) is provided. This door-side effect movable body 2241 is a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact, and corresponds to an example of a first movable body. In addition, the game board 200 is provided with a board-side effect movable body 2242 that falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the decorative symbol display device 208. The board-side effect movable body 2242 is a movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106, and corresponds to an example of a second movable body. The door side effect movable body 2241 and the board side effect movable body 2242 are driven and controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516 as the effect movable body 224 as described above. The initial (origin) position of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is the closed position (position accommodated in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. Is a position above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 13A, with the front frame door 106 closed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation, and during the decorative symbol variation display, that is, during the special symbol variation display. As shown in FIG. 5B, the door-side effect movable body 2241 opens, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in (c) while the effect movable body 224 is operating as shown in (b), the game board 200 is displayed as shown in (d). The board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the screen continues to operate, but the door-side effect movable body 2241 provided on the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position.

  After the front frame door 106 is opened, it returns to the initial position. This does not mean that the production operation returns to the initial position according to the production data, but means that the initial position return control (step S1203 shown in FIG. 11) forcibly returning to the initial position is performed. (same as below). In addition, the operation continues. This includes returning to the initial position according to the effect data. That is, it means that the production operation is continuously performed and the initial position return control is not performed (the same applies hereinafter).

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 that has not returned to the initial position by opening the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position when, for example, an abnormality occurs in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when abnormality arises in the decorative symbol display device 208, the door-side effect movable body 2241 does not return to the initial position (hereinafter the same). Other conditions for the initial position return operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 (corresponding to the second condition) include the following conditions. For example, the position may be returned to the initial position due to an abnormality in the board-side effect movable body 2242 itself (for example, the position is not detected). Moreover, you may make it perform the control which returns the board | board side production | generation movable body 2242 to an initial position for every design change start. Further, in a specific gaming state (for example, during probability change, during a short period of time, etc.), control for returning the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position may be performed. In addition, if the initial position of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is not detected, the board-side effect movable body 2242 may return to the initial position every time the symbol variation starts, and the panel may be changed by a specific symbol variation (for example, the variation or the variation within the hold). You may make it return to an initial position, when performing the production using the side production movable body 2242. That is, at least one condition may be that an effect command for driving the board-side effect movable body 2242 is received. Further, when a demonstration screen (standby screen) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, control for returning the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position may be performed. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball has not entered the first special figure starting port 230 (second special figure starting port 232), a process of returning the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position is performed. May be.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 13 described above, the first movable body (here, the door-side effect movable body 2241) performs the first operation (initial position return operation). That is, when the door body (here, the front frame door 106) is opened while the first movable body is moving, the first drive control means (here, the second sub-control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516) performs the first operation. Move one movable body to the initial position. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the first movable body from coming into contact with an external device or a person. Further, the second movable body (here, the board-side effect movable body 2242) continues to operate regardless of the operation state of the first movable body. Generally, when the door body (front frame door 106) is opened, it is a disadvantageous situation for the player (for example, a ball is clogged between the game nails 238, and a game cannot be performed). When the second movable body continues to operate while the door is open, it may be possible to show the player an effect and prevent the game motivation from being lost. Further, it may be possible to prevent the player from touching the board surface (particularly around the second movable body) while the door is open. Similarly, when the sensor for detecting the first movable body is provided at a position other than the initial position, the initial position returning operation is performed regardless of the position of the first movable body other than the initial position.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened in the first modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, in the description of the modified example, the components having the same names as the names of the components described so far will be described with reference numerals used so far. In addition, matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

  A first door-side effect movable body 2241a that opens upward is provided in the upper right part of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. A protruding second door-side effect movable body 2241b is provided. Also, the game board 200 is provided with a board-side effect movable body 2242 that falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the decorative symbol display device 208, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. . The initial (origin) position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the closed position (the position in which the front frame door 106 is accommodated) shown in FIG. The initial (origin) position is the retracted position (position where the front frame door 106 is accommodated) shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, with the front frame door 106 closed, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b protrudes forward, The side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in (c) while the effect movable body 224 is operating as shown in (b) of the same figure, the game board 200 is also provided in this first modification. The board-side effect movable body 2242 continues to operate, but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a provided on the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b also returns to the initial position. Return.

  A dedicated drive circuit may be provided for each of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable body 2242. Alternatively, the drive circuit may be provided separately for the door-side effect movable body and the board-side effect movable body. Also, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be a pair (for example, the same shape).

  In addition, you may provide the 3rd movable body controlled by the same control means as the 1st movable body (here 1st door side production movable body 2241a). For example, the third movable body may have the same shape as the first movable body. For example, the first movable movable body 2241a is provided at the upper left of the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. You may provide the 3rd door side production movable body of the same shape. The first movable body and the third movable body are provided at positions where they may come into contact with an external device or a person when the door body (here, the front frame door 106) is opened while the movable body is operating. It may be what was made. The first movable body and the third movable body may be controlled by the same control means and operate simultaneously. In addition, when the door is opened while the first movable body and the third movable body are in operation, both of the first operation (initial position returning operation) may be performed. Only the first operation (initial position returning operation) may be performed, or the operation may be stopped together. The third movable body may be controlled by a control means (for example, a drive circuit is different) different from that of the first movable body, or has a shape different from that of the first movable body. May be. Further, unlike the first movable body, the third movable body may be provided at a position where it does not hit an external device or a person even when the door is opened. In this case, even if the door is opened when the third movable body is operating, the initial position returning operation is not performed. For example, the operation may be continued or stopped on the spot. May be.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened in the second modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  A first door-side effect movable body 2241a that opens upward is provided at the upper right portion of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. A second door-side effect movable body 2241b to be opened is provided. Further, the game board 200 is provided with the same board-side effect movable body 2242 as before. The initial (origin) position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the closed position (position accommodated in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. 5A, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b. The initial (origin) position is also the closed position (position accommodated in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 15B, with the front frame door 106 closed, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b opens forward, The side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in (c) while the effect movable body 224 is operating as shown in (b), the game board 200 is displayed as shown in (d). Although the board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the screen continues to operate, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b opened forward, which has a relatively high possibility of contacting the player, returns to the initial position. On the other hand, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opened upward, which has a relatively low possibility of coming into contact with the player, stops operating. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a is a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact, but if the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is rotated upward and opened, there is a possibility that the player will contact the initial stage. It becomes relatively low as much as when it returns to the position. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward via a horizontal posture opened forward, and returns to the initial position via a horizontal posture opened forward. For this reason, even if it is the 1st door side production movable body 2241a, when the front frame door 106 is opened in the horizontal posture opened forward, it returns to the initial position, or conversely rotates upward. Move.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 15 described above, either the initial position returning operation or the stop on the spot is performed depending on the position of the first movable body (door-side effect movable body). A sensor for detecting the door-side effect movable body is provided at a position where the operation is completed, and when the door-side effect movable body is detected by the sensor, there is a high possibility that the position where the operation is completed contacts the player. Whether or not to perform the initial position return operation or stop on the spot is determined depending on whether or not it is the position. The same applies to the case where the sensor is provided between the initial position and the position where the operation is completed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the door-side effect movable body is behind the sensor provided at the initial position (position far from the initial position), the initial position returning operation may be performed.

  If the front frame door 106 is closed while the door-side effect movable body is stopped, the door-side effect movable body remains stopped even if the front frame door 106 is closed, and a predetermined trigger (for example, The initial position returning operation may be performed when a symbol variation start command is received or when any movable body is operated. Alternatively, when the front frame door 106 is closed, an initial position returning operation may be performed.

  Also in this example, the second movable body (board-side effect movable body 2242) continues to operate regardless of the operation status of the first movable body.

In the above description, “a first movable body (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241a or the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) provided at a position where the player can contact;
A second movable body (for example, a board-side effect movable body 2242) provided at a position where the player cannot contact,
A game machine equipped with
When the first condition (for example, opening of the front frame door 106) is satisfied, the first movable body has a first position (for example, the front frame door 106) that is an initial position of the first movable body. Back to the stowed position)
The second movable body is returned to the second position, which is the initial position of the second movable body, when a second condition (for example, an abnormality occurs in the decorative symbol display device 208) is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition different from the second condition.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  According to this game stand, the maintainability can be improved. In addition, since the initial position returning operation is performed according to the conditions, it may be possible to easily notice the failure of the effect movable body.

  When the door is opened during movement, the first drive control means may continue the operation of the first movable body. Further, when the first movable body performs the initial position returning operation, the second drive control unit may cause the second movable body to perform the initial position returning operation. Further, when the first movable body performs the initial position returning operation, the second drive control unit may stop the operation of the second movable body. Further, when the door body is closed in a state where the first movable body is stopped, the first drive control means causes the first movable body to continue from the time when the first movable body is stopped. Operation may be performed. Further, when it is determined that the first movable body is behind (a position farther from the initial position) than the detection means provided at the initial position for detecting the first movable body, at least the detection means side (initial stage) You may make it evacuate to the position side. A third movable body controlled by the same control means as the first movable body may be provided. In this case, the third movable body may have a different shape from the first movable body, or may have the same shape (including a point-symmetric shape and a line-symmetric shape).

In addition, "a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, front frame door 106)
Movable body control means for controlling the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, the second sub-control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516);
Have
The first movable body is provided at least on the door body,
The door body includes at least door opening detection means (for example, a frame door opening sensor 609) capable of detecting that the door body has been opened,
The first condition includes at least a condition established by detecting the opening of the door body by the door opening detection means,
The movable body control means does not return the second movable body to the second position when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

According to this game table, the door-side effect movable body 2241 may be prevented from coming into contact with an external device or a person. Also, the board-side effect movable body 2242 while the front frame door 106 is opened.
By continuing the operation, there are cases where it is possible to show the player an effect and prevent the game motivation from being lost. Furthermore, it may be possible to prevent the player from touching the board surface (particularly around the board side effect movable body 2242) while the front frame door 106 is opened.

  In addition, the movable body control means may have a control means provided for each movable body.

Further, “the movable body control means controls the first movable object to return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied while the first movable object is movable ( For example, step S1203) shown in FIG. 11 is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  In some cases, the game machine can also prevent the first movable body from coming into contact with an external device or a person.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened when the power is turned on in the third modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The upper part of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 16 is provided with a first arc-shaped first door-side effect movable body 2241a that protrudes forward and a lower part that protrudes forward. A convex arc-shaped second door side effect movable body 2241b is provided. Further, the game board 200 is provided with the same board-side effect movable body 2242 as before. The initial position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the initial position of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b are both retracted positions (positions stored in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. is there. When the first door-side effect movable body 2241, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 performs an initial position returning operation (power-on operation) when the power is turned on. That is, step S1302 shown in FIG. 12 is executed, and first, a power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is performed. As shown in FIG. 6B, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a once protrudes forward and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. It is determined that the current position is the initial position. The operation speed (first speed) of the door-side effect movable body (first door-side effect movable body 2241a, second door-side effect movable body 2241b) in the power-on operation will be described with reference to FIGS. The operating speed (second speed) in the initial position returning operation of the door-side effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is opened may be faster or slower. When the speed is high, the power-on operation can be completed quickly, and when the front frame door 106 is opened, it is possible to prevent injuries even if a person comes in contact with the initial position return. Normally, the power-on operation is performed before the opening of the store and is often performed in a state where there is no player. On the other hand, opening the front frame door 106 is often performed in front of the player due to ball clogging or the like. Considering this, the fast case is preferable. On the other hand, when the front frame door 106 is opened faster (it is slower when the power is turned on), the initial position return operation can be completed without touching the person during the initial position return. There is. In this case, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the initial position returning operation may be performed at the maximum speed of the door-side effect movable body. Note that the speed when the power is turned on (first speed) and the speed when the front frame door 106 is opened (second speed) may be the same without necessarily providing a difference between them. For example, both may be set to the maximum speed of the door-side effect movable body.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 4D, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b once protrudes forward. When the front frame door 106 is opened during the power-on operation as shown in FIG. 12E, step S1303 shown in FIG. 12 is executed, and as shown in FIG. The movable body 2241b stops on the spot.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (f), when the front frame door 106 is closed, the operation shifts to the power-on operation of the next effect movable body (here, the board-side effect movable body 2242), and the stopped second door side. The effect movable body 2241b remains stationary as it is, and returns to the initial position when a command for effecting is sent.

  When the front frame door 106 is closed, the power-on operation of the stopped effect movable body may be resumed.

  In addition, when the door (front frame door 106) is open, the first movable body (door-side effect movable body 2241) operates for a predetermined time (or a predetermined distance), and then the first An initial position returning operation of the movable body may be performed.

  Further, in this example, the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed after the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body 2242 is performed after the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is performed first. Then, the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body may be performed.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the power-on operation described with reference to FIG.

  The power-on operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a (see FIGS. 17A to 17C) is finished, and immediately before the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is started. When the frame door 106 is opened, the entire series of power-on operations is temporarily interrupted in the example shown in FIG. For this reason, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is not started. Further, the power-on operation of the board side effect movable body 2242 is not started. By doing so, it becomes easy to confirm whether the effect movable body is normal when performing maintenance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in (d2) of the figure, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is skipped, and even if the front frame door 106 is opened, it does not come into contact with an external device. The power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is executed first. Thereby, the time until the power-on operation is completed can be made shorter than the example shown in (d1).

  As shown in FIG. 5E, when the front frame door 106 is closed, the power-on operation is continued. That is, in the example shown in (d1) of the figure, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed, and then the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed. Further, in the example shown in (d2) in the figure, if the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is completed, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed. If there are a plurality of board-side production movable bodies and the power-on operation of all board-side production movable bodies is not completed, the power-on operation of all board-side production movable bodies will be The door-side effect movable body 2241b may be powered on, or the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be turned on first, leaving the panel-side effect movable body that has not been powered on. May be performed.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a state where power interruption / recovery is instantaneously performed while the door-side effect movable body is operating in the pachinko machine illustrated in FIG. 15.

  In FIG. 18A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 18B, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door side. The production movable body 2241b opens forward. At this time, power interruption occurs, the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes dark, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b are stopped.

  FIG. 1C1 shows an example when power is restored instantaneously. Both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, regardless of whether the front frame door 106 is open or closed, that is, regardless of whether the front frame door 106 is open or closed. The initial position return operation is performed to determine that the current position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the initial position, and the current position of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be the initial position. Determine.

  If the front frame door 106 is opened after performing the initial position return operation, the above power-on operation is not performed, and the power-on operation is performed after the front frame door 106 is closed. Also good. Conversely, the power-on operation may not be performed even when the front frame door 106 is closed. Further, in FIG. 10C1, the initial position return operation is performed regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106. However, if the front frame door 106 is opened at the time of power recovery, the initial position return operation is performed. Instead, the initial position return operation may be performed after the front frame door 106 is closed.

  FIG. 2C2 shows another example when power is restored instantaneously. In this example, both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b perform the initial position return operation when the front frame door 106 is opened. The initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106. For example, even when the front frame door 106 is opened before power is restored and before the initial position return operation is performed, the initial position return operation is performed and the front frame door 106 remains closed. Alternatively, an initial position return operation may be performed.

  The example described with reference to FIG. 18 (c1) and FIG. 18 (c2) may be as follows. When power is restored, the initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the current position of the board-side effect movable body. The initial position return operation may be performed only when the initial position is not reached. Further, when power is restored, the initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the current position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a (second door-side effect movable body 2241b). Furthermore, the initial position return operation may be performed only when the initial position is not reached.

In the above description, “providing power supply means (for example, power supply control unit 660) for supplying power,
The first movable body moves to the first position at a first speed when power supply is started by the power source means (for example, a power-on operation),
The first movable body moves to the first position at a second speed different from the first speed when the first condition is satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when the first condition is satisfied, the first movable body can be prevented from being injured even if it comes into contact with a person, or the initial stage can be reached soon before it comes into contact with a person. The position return operation can be completed.

  The first speed (second speed) may be the first speed (second speed).

  The second movable body moves at a third speed to the second position when power supply is started by the power supply means, and the second movable body is moved to the second position. When the condition is satisfied, the vehicle may move to the second position at a fourth speed different from the first speed.

  The third speed mentioned here may be faster than the fourth speed, may be a slow speed, or may be the same speed as the fourth speed.

  The first speed (second speed) may be slower than the third speed. Since the movement of the first movable body is relatively slow at the start of power supply, it is possible to ensure the safety of the player, maintenance person, etc., and the movement of the second movable body is relatively fast. The power-on operation is performed in a short time.

  Further, the first speed (second speed) may be faster than the third speed. Contact with the outside can be prevented, and maintenance can be improved such that the maintenance person can easily understand that the second movable body is not in the original position.

  The first speed (second speed) may be the same speed as the third speed.

  The first speed (second speed) may be a speed slower than the fourth speed. In addition to ensuring the safety of players, maintenance personnel, etc., when there is something hidden by the operation of the second movable body, the second movable body returns to the initial position relatively quickly. For this reason, what has been hidden can be seen quickly, and it may be possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being lowered.

  The first speed (second speed) may be faster than the fourth speed. Contact with the outside can be prevented, and there is an advantage that the player can easily notice an abnormality.

The first speed (second speed) may be the same speed as the fourth speed.
In addition, "we have power supply means to supply power,
The movable body control means performs a first initial operation process (for example, a step shown in FIG. 12) for moving the first movable body to the first position when power supply is started by the power supply means. S1302)
The movable body control means is configured to perform a second initial operation process (for example, one of power-on operations) for moving the second movable body to the second position when power supply is started by the power supply means. Part)
The movable body control means performs at least one of the first initial operation processing and the second initial operation processing, and then performs the other initial operation processing (for example, in FIG. 16). Example),
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.
In addition, "we have power supply means to supply power,
The movable body control means performs a first initial operation process (for example, a step shown in FIG. 12) for moving the first movable body to the first position when power supply is started by the power supply means. S1302)
The movable body control means is configured to perform a second initial operation process (for example, one of power-on operations) for moving the second movable body to the second position when power supply is started by the power supply means. Part)
The movable body control means performs the second initial operation process during the execution of the first initial operation process (for example, an example shown in FIG. 17 (d2)).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the power-on operation of the second movable body during the power-on operation of the first movable body may shorten the period during which it is difficult for the player to play the game.

  The movable body control means may perform the second initial operation process while temporarily suspending the first initial operation process and suspending the first initial operation process. Good.

  In the above description, the front frame door 106 is opened. However, even when the main body 104 is opened, the door side effect movable body 2241 is similarly returned to the initial position. However, if it takes more time to open the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 together due to the weight of the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 than the case where only the front frame door 106 is opened, the first frame door 106 and the main body 104 are opened. Although the timing for starting the initial position return operation of the movable body (door-side effect movable body 2241) is delayed, on the contrary, when the movable body tilts downward due to the weight of the main body 104, there is a movable object that contacts the external device. Assuming a certain case, the timing for starting the initial position returning operation may be accelerated.

  Also, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during or after the door-side effect movable body 2241 is operating, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is provided. The operation may be stopped. The operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is also performed when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during the initial position returning operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 while the front frame door 106 is open. May be stopped.

  Furthermore, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during or after the door-side effect movable body 2241 is operating, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is provided. The initial position returning operation may be performed. In addition, when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during the initial position returning operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 while the front frame door 106 is open, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is initially set. The position returning operation may be continued.

  In addition, as a method of determining the load of the load from the outside, for example, providing a detection means other than the initial position can be mentioned.

  Further, in the case of a rotating game machine (slot machine), the first movable body is provided at a position where the player of the door body can contact, and the position of the player inside the door body (the liquid crystal display device) The second movable body is provided at a position where a person can see such as the front side of the lamp, the inside of the lamp, and the interior of the decorative panel.

<Chance button>
Next, the structure of the above-described chance button 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a side sectional view for explaining the movement of the chance button 700. FIG. 19A is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 in the initial position, and FIG. FIG. 3C is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. FIGS. 6D to 6F are views showing only the lower case 704b and the rotating member 708b extracted in each state of FIGS. The chance button 700 corresponds to an example of a first movable body provided at a position where the player can contact.

  20A is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 20B is a diagram in which the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the chance button 700 includes a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the ball storage tray door 108 and a movable portion 704 (up and down movable relative to the fixed portion 702). 704a, 704b), a spring 706 that is contracted between the movable portion 704 and the door 108 with a ball storage tray and biases the movable portion 704 upward, and a drive that enables the movable portion 704 to move up and down. 708 (708a, 708b) and a detection unit 710 capable of detecting the position of the movable unit 704. Although not shown, the chance button lamp 138 described above is disposed at a predetermined position of the chance button 700.

  The fixed portion 702 is configured by two rod-shaped fixed shafts 702a erected on the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and a disk-shaped fixed plate 702b fixed at the ends of the two fixed shafts 702a. ing. As shown in FIG. 19D, the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted into insertion holes 704b1 formed in a lower case 704b described later and guide the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of restricting the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

  The movable portion 704 has an opening on one side and the upper case 704a having a cylindrical shape, which is an operation surface 704a1 on which the player's finger or hand contacts, and an upper portion so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. A disc-shaped lower case 704b fixed to the case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 19D to 19F, in the lower case 704b, two insertion holes 704b1 that are inserted through the respective fixed shafts 702a and a center through which a rotation member 708b of the drive unit 708 described later is inserted. An insertion hole 704b2, an engagement piece 704b3 protruding toward the center of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as a base end, and a detection protruding downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as a base end A piece 704b4 is formed.

  The drive unit 708 includes a drive source 708a configured by a motor, a solenoid, and the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b that is driven to rotate about the axis by the drive source 708a. A concave groove 708b1 is linearly formed from one side of the longitudinal direction to the other side of a part of the outer edge of the rotating member 708b, and the lower case 704b1 is engaged with the lower case 704b1 at the lower end side thereof. An engaging recess 708b2 that can engage with the piece 704b3 is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (d), the rotating member 708 b is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 706 by engaging the engaging recess 708 b 2 with the engaging piece 704 b 3 of the lower case 704 b. As shown in FIG. 19 (e), the engagement between the engagement recess 708b2 and the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b is released, so that the movable portion 704 is attached with the spring 706. It is possible to rotate between a permission position that allows movement upward by a force.

  The detection unit 710 includes an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is configured such that the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b can advance and retreat between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit. Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where the movable unit 704 is not pressed downward (the chance button 700 is pressed) as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b). The state in which the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b has not entered between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710) and the movable unit 704 is lower as shown in FIG. (The state in which the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b enters between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710).

  In the initial position shown in FIG. 19A and FIG. 20A, the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permitted position to the restricting position, and the movable portion 704 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating member 708, and the downward direction. It is possible to move only to In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710 so that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. is there.

  In the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 19B and 20C, the rotating member 708b is rotated from the restricted position to the permitted position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the restriction of the upward movement and the spring 706 is moved. It moves upward by the urging force, abuts against the fixed plate 702b, is again restricted from moving upward, and can move only downward. Even in this operation completion position, as shown in FIG. 19C, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

  The state shown in FIG. 19C is a state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 19B and 20C. In this embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed to near the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to move the rotating member 708b from the permitted position to the restricted position. The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, the state during the operation shown in FIG. 20B, that is, the chance button 700 is changed from the initial position shown in FIGS. 19A and 20A to FIGS. In the state of moving to the operation completion position shown in (c), even if the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710 Is ignored (the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is not determined to be valid).

  With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the chance button 700 during the operation of the chance button 700, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at an unintended timing by the player. It may be possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is ignored during the operation of the chance button 700. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing operation during the operation of the chance button 700 is validated. May be.

  In addition, when the chance button is pressed before the operation of the chance button (when the chance button is pressed before the detection is accepted), the pressing operation of the chance button may be ignored. The pressing operation may be validated. In addition, when the chance button pressing operation is valid, the chance button may be operated, or the chance button may not be operated. In these cases, the chance button can be accepted, or the chance button can be accepted.

<Operation reception production>
Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between the operation state of the chance button 700, whether or not the detection result of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is accepted, and whether or not the operation acceptance effect can be executed.

  FIG. 22A is an external perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 22B is a ball when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. FIG. 6C is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a storage tray, and FIG. 10C shows the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). It is an external perspective view. FIG. 4D is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 4E is a case where the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. It is a figure showing an example of operation reception effect to perform, and the figure (f) is an example of operation reception effect performed when chance button 700 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG.

<Operation reception effect / initial position>
When the first sub control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the initial position shown in FIG. 22A (before the operation shown in FIG. 21), the detection unit 710 causes the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b to be moved. It becomes a detectable state (a state in which a detection result can be accepted). In addition, when a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this initial position, a chance button effect corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Here, as the chance button effect, for example, an effect of changing an image or a character displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the number of times or the speed of pressing the chance button 700, or the timing of pressing the chance button 700, for example. An effect such as changing an image or a character can be given depending on, but is not limited thereto. That is, it is only necessary to have an effect in which at least a part of the mode (display (eg, animation, image, character, etc.), sound, movement, color, etc.) changes according to the pressing operation of the chance button 7000.

  In addition, there may be a single aspect or a plurality of aspects. For example, in the case of a plurality of combinations, the combination with the same category (display, sound, movement, color, etc.) The color may change from red to blue, LED2 changes from white to blue, etc.), combinations with different categories (for example, display in liquid crystal (change from display A to display B), chance button It may be its own operation (change from no operation to rotation operation).

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the initial position (before operation), the first sub-control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. Further, by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is suggested to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed, and as shown in FIG. Using the symbol display device 208, an operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed (in this example, a character display “Press the chance button !!” and blue at the initial position) (An image display imitating the chance button 700 emitting light and an image display of a downward arrow).

  In this way, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player can be sure at the initial position. A pressing operation can be performed. Note that the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect using various lamps 418, the effect using the speaker 120, and the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed. That is, the operation reception effect may be an effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed.

<Operation reception production / in operation>
The first sub-control unit 400 detects when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 22 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 22 (b) (during the operation shown in FIG. 21). Even if the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the unit 710, the detection result is ignored (so that the detection result cannot be accepted). Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute the above-described chance button effect. In addition, after accepting the detection result of the chance button 700 (after the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is once validated), it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 is in operation. In some cases, the chance button effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation), the first sub-control unit 400 does not light the chance button lamp 138 and does not perform the operation reception effect. It is configured as follows. As described above, if the chance button 700 is not lighted and the operation reception effect is not executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is invalid, which is disadvantageous due to an erroneous operation. Will not suffer.

<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>
When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 22B (after completion of the operation shown in FIG. 21), the detection piece of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. 704b4 can be detected (detection result can be received). In addition, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at the operation completion position, the above-described chance button effect is performed.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position (after the operation is completed), the first sub control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. As shown, the chance button 700 is illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, red) to indicate to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed, as shown in FIG. 22 (e). The operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed using the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!” and the operation is completed. (An image display imitating the chance button 700 emitting red light at the position and an image display of a downward arrow).

  As described above, if the chance button 700 is caused to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player can be sure at the operation completion position. The pressing operation can be performed.

<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>
As shown in FIG. 22C, the first sub control unit 400 can detect the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b by the detection unit 710 even when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. (A state in which the detection result can be accepted). Here, the case where the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position is, for example, the case where the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is caught by the fixed portion 702 and the movable portion 704 cannot be raised to the operation completion position. An example is a case where the biasing force of the spring 706 of the chance button 700 is weakened and the movable part 704 cannot be raised to the operation completion position.

  Further, even when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation of the chance button 700 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. An operation reception effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (the effect shown in FIG. 22 (e)) performed after the operation is completed) that suggests to the player that it is possible is performed.

  As described above, even when the chance button 700 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the chance button 700 is enabled, the operation of the chance button 700 is performed even when the chance button 700 breaks down. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 700 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  In this example, when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button 700 does not emit light in a predetermined color. For example, a color different from the initial position or the operation completion position is used. (For example, green) may be emitted, or light may be emitted in the same color (for example, blue or red) as before or after the operation is completed.

  In this example, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color. For example, the chance button 700 may blink in a predetermined color. In this case, the initial position, the operation completion position, the initial position, and the operation completion may be performed. The blinking pattern may be changed at each of the stops between positions. For example, blinking is repeated at a first cycle (for example, 1 second) at the initial position, and blinking is repeated at a second cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first cycle at the operation completion position. When the movement is stopped between the operation completion positions, blinking is repeated in a third period (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the first period.

  With such a configuration, the player can grasp that the pressing operation is possible in each state, and can also grasp that each state is different, In some cases, a pressing operation suitable for the state can be performed.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has the operating means (for example, the chance buttons 700 and 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation) that can be operated by the player. Section 758, the bet button 132, and a pressing surface of these buttons and operation section), presentation means (for example, the first sub-control section 400) capable of executing at least presentation, and moved means (for example, upper case 704a) , A movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least performing movement control for moving the base 754), wherein the operation means is the movement by the movement control means. When the control is performed, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 20A, 22A, 23A, and 33A) to the second position (for example, , FIG. 22 (c), FIG. 23 (b), and FIG. 33 (c)), and the rendering means performs the second control when the movement control is performed. When the operation means moved to the position is operated, a special effect can be executed at least. The effect means is operated by the operation means in spite of the movement control. Even if it does not move to the second position, at least the special effect (for example, the effect when the button shown in FIG. 36 (c) is pressed) can be executed in response to the operation means being operated. It is a game table characterized by being.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The buttons 132 and the pressing surfaces of these buttons and the operation unit), the production means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least the production, and the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a and the base 754). And a movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of performing at least movement control for moving the game device, wherein the operation means is controlled by the movement control means. In this case, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 20 (a), 22 (a), 23 (a), and 33 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 20 ( c), FIG. ), The movement completion position shown in FIG. 23 (b) and FIG. 33 (c)), and when the special performance execution condition is satisfied (for example, the bet button 132 is initially set). At a position other than the position and the operation completion position, a special effect (for example, an effect upon pressing the button shown in FIG. 36C) is executed at least when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at the position. The special performance execution condition is satisfied when any of a plurality of conditions is satisfied, and the first condition among the plurality of conditions is the movement It is established when the operation means that has moved to the second position due to control is operated, and the second condition among the plurality of conditions is that the movement control is performed. Nevertheless Even if the operation unit is not moved to the second position, in which established in response to the manipulation means has been operated, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation means cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the operation means is operated by the player. By enabling the production according to the situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by suggesting to the player that the operation has been accepted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, operation accepting means capable of accepting at least an operation by the player (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet button 132, and these buttons and operations. And the operation means may be provided in the operation reception means.

  The special effect may not be performed even if the operation means is operated during the execution of the movement control.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, the rendering means may be capable of at least rendering an effect in response to the operation means being operated by a player even when the moved means is located at the first position. .

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period during which the operation can be detected, there are cases where the player has more opportunities to operate the operation unit and can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, a notification unit capable of performing at least notification for prompting the operation of the operation unit is provided, and the notification unit moves the operation unit to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed. Even if it is not, the notification may be performed.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with operating means (for example, a chance button 700) that can be operated by the player. A touchable operation portion (for example, an upper case 704a) is provided, and the operation portion is moved from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 20A) to a second position (for example, FIG. c) a drive means (for example, the drive unit 708) that can move at least to the operation completion position shown in c), a drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) that can control the drive of the drive means, and the drive When the operation means is moved by the player to the second position and then the operation means is operated by the player, the production means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least producing an effect; The directing hand Is the case where the operation unit has not been moved to the second position after the drive unit has performed control to move the operation unit from the first position toward the second position ( For example, even when the operation unit is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 22C), at least an effect can be executed in response to the operation of the operation means by the player ( For example, as shown in FIG. 22C, when the chance button 700 is pressed at the timing of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button effect corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot be moved to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation unit, the operation unit is operated by the player. By enabling the production according to the situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by suggesting to the player that the operation has been accepted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the rendering means is in the middle of the control in which the driving means moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 20B). Alternatively, it may be configured so that the effect is not executed even when the operation means is operated by the player.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, even when the operation unit is located at the first position, at least an effect may be executed in response to the operation means being operated by the player.

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period during which the operation can be detected, there are cases where the player has more opportunities to operate the operation unit and can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the information processing device includes notification means (for example, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least notification for prompting operation of the operation means, and the notification means is configured such that the operation unit has the second position. Even if it has not been moved to, the notification (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 22F) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the operation unit can be operated even if the operation unit does not move to the position where the operation unit is originally moved, so that the player misses the opportunity to operate the operation unit. There are cases where it can be prevented. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and the operation unit), the production unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least production, and the notification unit (for example, chance button) capable of executing at least notification. Lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and movement control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, upper case 704a, base 754). The operating device has a first position (for example, FIG. 20 (a), FIG. 20) when the movement control by the movement control device is performed. 2 (a), FIG. 23 (a), the initial position shown in FIG. 33 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 20 (c), FIG. 22 (c), FIG. 23 (b), FIG. 33). c) is moved to the operation completion position shown in c), and the production means is special when the operation means moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed. It is possible to execute at least the effect (the effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 36C), and the notifying unit is configured so that the operation unit is in the second position in spite of the movement control being performed. The player can operate the operation means even when the player does not move to the position (for example, when the vehicle stops between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 22C). (For example, an operation reception performance as shown in FIG. 22 (f)). That it is possible to perform), it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and the operation unit), the production unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least production, and the notification unit (for example, chance button) capable of executing at least notification. Lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and movement control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, upper case 704a, base 754). The operating device has a first position (for example, FIG. 20 (a), FIG. 20) when the movement control by the movement control device is performed. 2 (a), FIG. 23 (a), the initial position shown in FIG. 33 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 20 (c), FIG. 22 (c), FIG. 23 (b), FIG. 33). The operation means moves to the operation completion position shown in c), and the production means produces a special production (production when the button shown in FIG. 36 (c) is pressed) when the special production execution condition is satisfied. Can be executed at least, and the special performance execution condition is established when any one of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, and one condition among the plurality of conditions is: This is established when the operation means that has moved to the second position is operated due to the movement control being performed, and the notification means is configured to perform the operation in spite of the movement control being performed. When the means has not moved to the second position (for example, FIG. 22 Even when it is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in c), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, FIG. 22 ( It is possible to perform an operation reception effect as shown in f)).

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation unit, the game is performed by informing the user of the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, the notification means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means when the movement control is being executed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, the notification means indicates that the operation means has moved to the second position when the operation means has been moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed. (For example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 22E) is executed at least, and the notification means has not moved to the second position even though the movement control is performed. Even if it is a case, it is configured to execute at least the same suggestion (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 22F) as the notification indicating that the operation means has moved to the second position. Also good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

  The informing means is a plurality of informing means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208). The informing means that the player can operate the operating means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an operable opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) that can be operated by the player and the operation means. And a notifying means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and an operating portion (for example, an upper case 704a) that can be contacted by a player is provided in the operating means. The operation unit can be moved at least from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 20A) to a second position (for example, an operation completion position shown in FIG. 20C). Means (for example, the drive unit 708), drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive unit, and the operation unit is moved to the second position by the drive unit. The When the operation means is operated by a player, the display means includes an effect means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that can execute at least an effect, and the notification means includes the drive means that controls the operation section. After performing control to move from the first position toward the second position, the operation unit has not been moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 22C) Even when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, an operation reception as shown in FIG. 22 (f)). It is possible to produce an effect), and this is a gaming table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the game is provided by informing the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the notification unit is in the middle of control in which the driving unit moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation illustrated in FIG. 20B). Alternatively, the operation means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of notification means that the player can operate the operation means. The notification may be made by at least one notification means.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an operable opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to at least give an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position. May be.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not producing the result of accepting the operation, and to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. There is a case. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, it may be configured not to accept the player's operation by the operation means (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored) May be configured).

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not accepting the detection of the operation, and to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification unit notifies the user that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 22 (e)). At least the operation reception effect shown), and the same suggestion as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, you may comprise so that at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG.22 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

<Modified example of chance button>
Next, a modified example of the chance button will be described. FIG. 23A is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 before the operation, and FIG. 23B is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 after the operation is completed. FIG. 24 is a front view of the chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of the second operation unit 758.

  The chance button 750 includes a base 754 having a substantially triangular prism shape that is isosceles in a side view, a first operation unit 756 provided on the first surface of the base 754, and a first surface of the base 754. A second operating portion 758 provided on the second orthogonal surface, a first gear 754b fixed to the rotary shaft 754a on one side of the base 754, and a second gear meshing with the first gear 754b A gear 754c and a drive source 754d composed of a motor that rotationally drives the second gear 754c are included. The base 754 of the chance button 750 activates the drive source 754d, so that the rotation shaft 754a is the center between the initial position shown in FIG. 23A and the operation completion position shown in FIG. It is configured to be rotatable.

  The first operation unit 756 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor, a sensor circuit, or the like that can detect a pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. When the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 23A, the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756, while the base 754 is shown in FIG. The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated in the operation completion position shown in FIG. That is, the player can perform an operation using the first operation unit 756 only when the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. Even when the base 754 is at the operation completion position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 may be validated.

  In addition, the second operation unit 758 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor, a sensor circuit, and the like that can detect a pressing operation of the second operation unit 758. When the base 754 is in the operation completion position shown in FIG. 23B, the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, while the base 754 has the configuration shown in FIG. ), The detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated. That is, the player can perform an operation with the second operation unit 758 only when the base 754 is at the operation completion position shown in FIG. Note that the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be validated even when the base 754 is in the initial position.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) that can be operated by the player and the operation means. And a notifying means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and an operating portion (for example, an upper case 704a) that can be contacted by a player is provided in the operating means. The operation unit can be moved at least from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 20A) to a second position (for example, an operation completion position shown in FIG. 20C). Means (for example, the drive unit 708), drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive unit, and the operation unit is moved to the second position by the drive unit. The When the operation means is operated by a player, the display means includes an effect means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that can execute at least an effect, and the notification means includes the drive means that controls the operation section. After performing control to move from the first position toward the second position, the operation unit has not been moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 22C) Even when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, an operation reception as shown in FIG. 22 (f)). It is possible to produce an effect), and this is a gaming table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the game is provided by informing the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the notification unit is in the middle of control in which the driving unit moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation illustrated in FIG. 20B). Alternatively, the operation means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of notification means that the player can operate the operation means. The notification may be made by at least one notification means.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an opportunity to operate by performing notification that prompts the operation. The plurality of notification means may at least notify that the player can operate the operation means, and the first notification means and the second notification means among the plurality of notification means play the operation means. It may be notified at least that the person can operate.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to at least give an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position. May be.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not producing the result of accepting the operation, and to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. There is a case. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, it may be configured not to accept the player's operation by the operation means (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored) May be configured).

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not accepting the detection of the operation, and to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification unit notifies the user that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 22 (e)). At least the operation reception effect shown), and the same suggestion as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, you may comprise so that at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG.22 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

<Operation reception effect of chance button 750>
Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 750 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 2B is a side of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. The cross-sectional view (c) is a side cross-sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down).

  FIG. 6D is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 5E is a diagram when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. It is a figure showing an example of operation reception effect to perform, and the figure (f) is an example of operation reception effect performed when chance button 750 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG.

<Operation reception effect / initial position>
As described above, when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 25A, the pachinko machine according to the modified example validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. On the other hand, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated.

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position, the first operation unit of the chance button 750 is used at a predetermined timing by using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the operation of pressing 756 is possible (in this example, a character display of “Press the chance button !!”, an image display imitating the first operation unit 756, and a downward direction. (Image display of arrow).

  Thus, if the operation acceptance effect is executed at a timing at which the operation of the first operation unit 756 can be performed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is effective. The player can reliably perform the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the initial position.

  Instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 can be pressed by causing the first operation unit 756 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). You may suggest it to the player. Further, the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect using various lamps 418, the effect using the speaker 120, and the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed.

<Operation reception production / in operation>
In the pachinko machine according to the modified example, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 25A to the operation completion position shown in FIG. Both the detection result of the pressing operation of 756 and the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 are invalidated. When the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position, the operation reception effect is not performed.

<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>
When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 25B, the pachinko machine according to the modified example enables the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated. In this way, by deactivating the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the operation completion position, when the chance button 750 returns from the operation completion position to the initial position, an object is placed between the chance button 750 and the main body. And a situation where a player's hand is caught may be avoided, and safety may be improved.

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position, the second operation of the chance button 750 is performed at a predetermined timing using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the operation of pressing the part 758 is possible (in this example, “Please press the super chance button!”, A character display different from the case of the first operation part 756, (Image display imitating the second operation unit 758 and image display of a downward arrow). In this way, when there are a plurality of types of operation units, if the operation reception effects corresponding to the respective operation units are different, it is possible to avoid mistakes in pressing the operation unit, etc. In some cases, decline can be prevented. Instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the second operation unit 758 can be pressed by causing the second operation unit 758 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red). You may suggest it to the player.

  The content of the operation reception effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 25E. For example, the image display imitating the second operation unit 758 (operation unit) may not be performed, and a downward arrow may be displayed. It is not necessary to display an image. When the operation unit is caused to emit light, the luminance of the operation unit may be lower than the luminance of other parts (for example, the outer frame 102 or the game board 200), or higher than the luminance of other parts. May be. With such a configuration, the operation unit can be made more conspicuous than other parts, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the operation unit that can be operated, and the convenience of the player can be improved. is there.

  In addition, as the operation reception effect, a display (for example, a meter or a time display) indicating a period during which the operation can be received may be performed. In this case, the remaining time during which the operation of the operation unit can be received may be displayed. Good.

  Further, the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 and the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be simultaneously detected. In this case, as the operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation unit 758 are detected. The operation reception effect (for example, “Press the chance button or the super chance button !!”), the first operation unit 756 and the second operation It is preferable to perform image display imitating the portion 758 and image display of a downward arrow. With such a configuration, variations of operations by the player can be widened, and the player's willingness to play may be increased.

  Further, the operation reception effect in this case is an effect that suggests that either one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit can be pressed (for example, “Press the chance button !!”). (Character notation). Moreover, when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, only one of the operation reception notifications may be performed.

<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>
The pachinko machine according to the modified example is configured to validate the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 even when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. Here, when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, the base 754 of the chance button 750 is hooked on the main body or the like to reach the operation completion position from the initial position (or from the operation completion position). An example of such a case is that it cannot be rotated (to the initial position).

  Further, even when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the player is informed that the chance button 750 can be pressed at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. The suggested operation reception effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (the effect shown in FIG. 25E) performed after the operation is completed) is performed.

  As described above, even when the chance button 750 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the chance button 750 is enabled, the operation of the chance button 750 is performed even when the chance button 750 is broken. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 750 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  It should be noted that an operation reception effect (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 25 (e)) performed when the user is at the operation completion position and an operation reception effect (for example, when the operation reception effect is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position). The mode of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 25 (f) may be different. For example, the first type of notification means (for example, two types of liquid crystal display device and lamp) is used for the operation reception effect that is performed when the user is at the operation completion position. A second type of notification means (for example, three types of liquid crystal display device, lamp, and speaker) different from the first type may be used for the operation reception effect performed when the operation is stopped.

  In addition, the same type of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, an operation reception effect performed when the operation reception effect is performed when the operation is completed, and an operation reception effect performed when the operation is completed between the initial position and the operation completion position) And a speaker), some of the notification means may be different. For example, in the operation reception effect that is performed at the operation completion position, the first display (for example, character display and image display) is performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the operation performed when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. In the reception effect, a second display (for example, only character display) different from the first display may be performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the lamp and the speaker may perform the same effect.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify whether the chance button 750 is at a predetermined position or at a position other than the predetermined position, and an operation according to the state of the chance button 750 may be prompted.

<Example of slot machine>
Next, an example of a slot machine will be described. A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 26 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 110 to 112 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are generally displayed three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that displays a plurality of combinations of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 113 is disposed on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating the winning line 114 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal win line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right The down line and the upper right line may be set as valid pay lines, and the same number of pay lines may be set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

  The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of 3 cards are inserted, 2 when the bet button 131 is pressed, and 3 when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. In addition, the bet button 132 also functions as a chance button that changes the mode of effect by the player's operation. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button 132. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that the game can be started. The lamp 121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141. is there. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop button 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The payment button 134 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  Below the stop button unit 136 is provided a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and pasting various types of certificate. At the lower part of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 160 is disposed above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. And a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front side (player side) of the slot machine 100 when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157. It has become.

  FIG. 27 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by the upper surface plate 261, the left side plate 260, the right side plate 260, the lower surface plate 264, and the back plate 242, and that opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores the main control board is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper portion of the back plate 242. Below the three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. On the side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, a sub control board storage case 220 containing a sub control board is disposed. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs the information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  The lower surface plate 264 is provided with a medal payout device 180 (device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket), and has a power supply board above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as a main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500 described later. To do. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power source is cut off is provided. Yes.

  A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind this (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting a power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected thereto extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. Yes.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and an effect device 160 and an effect control board (which controls the effect device 160) are provided above the symbol display window 113. An upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the symbol display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals etc. on the medal tray 161. Yes. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

  The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into main effects according to a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery of a winning combination, and reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 314 as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312. The counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 at every interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts main processing main processing described later).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, and a medal slot 141 at every interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110 , The index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. Receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 are installed in each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 131 sensor are installed in each of the bet button 130 and the bet button 131, and are inserted when a medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 is inserted as an inserted medal into the game. Detect operations. The bet button 132 sensor is installed on the bet button 132. When the bet button 132 functions as a medal insertion button, a medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 is inserted as an insertion medal into the game. When the betting button 132 is functioning as a chance button, a pressing operation of the chance button is detected.

  The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. Becomes L level. When detecting this signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A driving circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 338 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start possible lamp 121, and a stored number A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

  Further, an information output circuit 334 (external concentration terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

  The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 is a voltage of the power source. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with a command from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various kinds of lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. (A lamp for causing the bet button 132 to emit light) and the like.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with a shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404. A sensor circuit 426 is provided, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interruption time.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 425, and a drive unit 427 that drives the bet button 132 up and down is connected to the drive circuit 425. The operation of the bet button 132 will be described in detail in the following <Bet button 132>.

  In addition, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to the second sub control unit 500 via the output interface. Second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of effect device 160 including display control of effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is configured by a plurality of control units such as a control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various driving devices for effects. Also good.

  The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The second sub control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S101. In this initial setting, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314, and initial setting Set the value. In step S103, medal insertion / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 120 is turned on in response to the insertion of the medal. Note that when a re-win is won in the previous game, a process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that it is not necessary for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If there is an operation of the start lever 135, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S105, the number of inserted medals is determined and an effective winning line is determined. In step S107, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired. In step S109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random value acquired in step S107. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is won internally, the flag of the winning combination is turned ON. In step S111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result.

  In step S113, rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started. In step S115, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop control in which one of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S111. Stop based on data. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117. In step S117, a winning determination is performed. Here, when a picture combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For example, if “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the bell. In step S119, if any winning combination with payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

  In step S121, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control process, a process related to transition of each game state of normal game, BB game, RB game, and internal winning game is performed, and the game state is shifted when those start conditions and end conditions are satisfied. Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing, the game proceeds.

<Main controller 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and each of the various sensors 318 is partitioned in the RAM 308. Store in the provided signal state storage area. Further, when information indicating the presence of a detection signal is stored in the signal state storage area corresponding to the bet button 132, preparations for transmitting a bet button reception command to the first sub-control unit 400 are made.

  In step S207, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318), and processing according to this status is performed (for example, the interrupt status of each acquired stop button 137 to 139). Based on the stop button reception process). In step S209, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, start lever reception command, bet button reception command, production command accompanying production lottery processing, rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, stop button 137 through 139, a stop button acceptance command accompanying acceptance of the operation 139, a stop position information command accompanying the stop processing of the reels 110 to 112, a payout number command and a payout end command accompanying the medal payout processing, a command indicating a gaming state, etc.), bits 0 to 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). To have.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In step S213, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence / absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal payout abnormality is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, according to the current gaming state, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221. When the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. On the other hand, in step S221, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command is received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 406 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S309. For example, if there is a command to the drive circuit 424 for the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S316, a movable object control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the drive unit 427 of the bet button 132 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 425.

  In step S317, an information output process for performing setting to transmit a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309 is performed. For example, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 31A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S502, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S315, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S601 in FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S609, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 506 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated. In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step S603.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 32A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S803, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S611 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 536. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S905. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S905, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 includes information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 536). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S907, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S909, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input based on the end of image drawing. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S911. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S911, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Bet button 132>
FIG. 33A is an external perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 33B is a state in which the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). (B) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position.

  The bet button 132 has substantially the same structure as the chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls the drive unit 427, whereby the initial position shown in FIG. And an operation completion position shown in FIG. 33 (c) are configured to be movable up and down.

<Bet button 132 / initial position>
In the initial position shown in FIG. 25 (a), the movable part of the bet button 132 is in a state in which the upward movement is restricted by a rotating member (not shown) and can only move downward. In this initial position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor. Can be detected.

<Bet button 132 / operation completion position>
In the operation completion position shown in FIG. 33 (c), the movable part of the bet button 132 is released from the restriction of the upward movement and is moved upward by the urging force of the spring (not shown), and the fixed plate (not shown) ), The movement in the upward direction is again restricted, and the movement is possible only in the downward direction. Even in this operation completion position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, whereby the bet button 132 is pressed. The operation can be detected.

<Bet button 132 / in operation>
In the state shown in FIG. 33B, that is, during the operation in which the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position shown in FIG. 33A to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 33C, the bet button 132 is played. So that the detection result of the bet button 132 sensor is ignored even if the detected piece of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor (so as not to determine that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid). It is composed.

  With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the bet button 132 during the operation of the bet button 132, the press operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player. It may be possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the operation of pressing the bet button 132 is ignored during the operation of the bet button 132. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of pressing the bet button 132 is enabled. May be.

<When using the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button>
FIG. 34A is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. The slot machine 100 is provided with the notification lamp 123, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion enable lamp 124, the game start enable lamp 121, and the game medal insertion lamp 129 described above.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game medal insertion enabling lamp 124 is lit, and the number of lighting of the game medal insertion lamp 129 is less than the prescribed number of medals required for one game (3 in this example). The state is a state in which a player can start a game by inserting a specified number of medals, and a medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet button 132. That is, in this state, the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button, and the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the bet button lamp (not shown) and sets the bet button 132 to a predetermined color (for example, yellow). ) To indicate to the player that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective. When a prescribed number of medals are inserted by the player, as shown in FIG. 5B, the game start ready lamp 121 is turned on to notify that the game start operation is possible. The

  The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned off when the number of medals that can be electronically stored in the slot machine 100 reaches the maximum storage number (for example, 50), and it is notified that the medal cannot be inserted. . When medals are inserted while the game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned off (when medals exceeding the maximum number of stored medals are to be inserted), the medals are forcibly discharged from the medal outlet 155. It is composed.

<When the bet button 132 cannot be used>
FIG. 34B is a diagram for explaining a state where the bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button. As shown in FIG. 5B, the game medal insertion enable lamp 124 and the game start enable lamp 121 are lit, and the number of the game medal insertion lamps 129 is the same as the prescribed number (3 in this example). In this state, the player can start the game, and can start the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 (start the game) by pressing the start lever 135.

  When the game start ready lamp 121 is lit, a predetermined number of medals have been inserted, so that no medals are inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed (the detection result of pressing the medal insertion button is not accepted). , The bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button). In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is invalid by turning off the bet button lamp.

  Even when the game start ready lamp is lit, the bet button 132 can be used as a chance button. For example, while the replay lamp 122 is lit, a medal cannot be inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed. On the other hand, for example, an effect that prompts the user to press the bet button 132 as an effect between the game in which the re-game player wins and the start of the next game (until the start lever 135 is pressed and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating). May be performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid by turning on the bet button lamp. The effect of prompting the user to press the bet button 132 may be performed during a period other than the illustrated period.

<When using the bet button 132 as a chance button>
FIG. 34C is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 35A is a case where the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). The middle perspective view of the bet button 132, FIG. 35B is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position, and FIG. 35C is the initial position of the bet button 132. It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when it stops between the operation completion positions and (for example, when it fails).

  FIG. 34 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the operation acceptance effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 35 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the normal effect. FIG. 35 (e) is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position, and FIG. 35 (g) is a diagram between the initial position and the operation completion position. It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when it stops at (for example, when it breaks down).

<Operation reception effect / initial position>
When the bet button 132 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 34C, the first sub-control unit 400 has a predetermined timing (for example, a timing to start receiving a detection result of the bet button pressing). The bet button lamp is lit and the bet button 132 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue) to indicate to the player that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective, and the second sub-control unit 500 shows an operation reception effect (in this example, the character of the lord) that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157 as shown in FIG. Display an image showing a signboard on which a bet button 132 emitting blue light is drawn.

  In this example, in order to make the player easily determine whether the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button or a chance button, the bet button 132 is lit in different colors. You may make it light-emit with a color. In this example, the bet button 132 is caused to emit light in a predetermined color. For example, the bet button 132 may be flashed in a predetermined color. In this case, the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button. The blinking pattern may be changed depending on when the bet button 132 is used as a chance button. For example, when used as a medal insertion button, blinking is repeated at a first period (for example, 1 second), and when used as a chance button, a second period (for example, 0. (5 seconds).

  With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the function of the button, and can prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to a button operation error or the like. is there. When the detection result of the bet button press can be received, the bet button lamp does not have to be lit, the operation reception effect does not have to be performed, and the operation of the operation means (or operation unit) is prompted. There is no need to produce a performance.

<Operation reception production / in operation>
The first sub-control unit 400 operates the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 35A, that is, moves the bet button 132 from the initial position shown in FIG. 34C to the operation completion position shown in FIG. In the case of moving to the position, the bet button lamp is not turned on, and the operation reception effect is not performed. In this example, the effect image display device 157 performs a normal effect as shown in FIGS. 35 (d) and 36 (a). Here, as a normal effect, in the case of a pachinko machine, there are a fluctuating effect, a reach effect, a jackpot effect, and in the case of a slot machine, an effect during BB, an effect during reel rotation, There are directing.

  Note that the bet button lamp may be turned on during operation, or the brightness of the bet button lamp may be gradually increased. Further, when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, the bet button lamp is lit in the first color (for example, red), and when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid, the bet button lamp is displayed in the second color (for example, white). It may be lit with. In addition, when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, the bet button lamp is lit at the first luminance, and when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid, the bet button lamp is lit at the second luminance lower than the first luminance. May be.

<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>
When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the bet button 132 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 35 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 turns the bet button lamp at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 35 (b). Illuminates and lights up the bet button 132 in a predetermined color (for example, red) to indicate to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed, as shown in FIG. An operation display effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157 (in this example, an image display imitating the bet button 132 that emits red light at the operation completion position). And a downward arrow image display).

<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>
Even when the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 35C stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state in which the pressing operation of the bet button 132 can be detected by the detection unit. Become. Here, when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, when the movable part of the bet button 132 is caught by the fixed part and the movable part cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position, An example is the case where the urging force of the spring 132 is weakened and the movable part cannot be raised to the operation completion position.

  Further, even when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 can be used as a medal insertion button and as a chance button, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 35 (g) and 36 (b), an operation reception effect (in this example) suggesting that the player can press the bet button 132 at a predetermined timing. Then, the operation reception effect performed after the operation is completed (the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 35E) is performed.

  Thus, even when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the bet button 132 can be accepted, the bet button 132 can be operated even when the bet button 132 is broken. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  FIG. 36C is an example of a special effect displayed when an operation on the bet button 132 is received. This effect is not only when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position and the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position, but also when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position. This is a special effect that is also displayed when an operation of the bet button 132 is received at the position. It should be noted that even if the button is not pressed, it may be displayed after a certain period of time (for example, after the end of the period during which the button can be accepted). (The operation pattern may be changed), light emitting means such as LEDs are lit (the light emission pattern may be changed), and sounds such as BGM and sound effects can be heard from sound output means such as speakers. Also good.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the above-described embodiment. For example, in addition to the liquid crystal display device and the lamp, the presentation unit and the notification unit according to the present invention include a speaker, A movable body, operation means itself, etc. can be applied. Therefore, the presentation by the presentation means and the notification by the notification means are not limited to the display by the liquid crystal display device or the light emission by the lamp. But you can. Further, the operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the bet button, and any operation means that can be operated by the player may be used.

  Further, the notification means may notify that the operation means does not accept the operation, or may notify that the operation means is in an error state. Further, there is one notification means, and the same notification mode may be performed even when the operation means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. Further, there is one notification means, and a different notification mode may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the originally moving position. Here, the “different notification mode” may be any of the case where notification is not performed, the case where notification is performed, and the case where notification is not performed.

  Further, there are a plurality of notification means, and at least one or all of the plurality of notification means may perform notification that prompts an operation. Further, there are a plurality of notification means, and different notification modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the originally moving position. Here, the “different notification mode” may include a case where a predetermined notification unit among a plurality of notification units does not perform notification, or may include a case where all of the plurality of notification units do not perform notification. The operation means according to the present invention may be a BET, a stop button, a lever, or the like.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of effects as a result of accepting an operation by one notifying unit, at least one of the plurality of effects may not be performed when the operating unit is not operating up to the second position where it originally moves. Good. In addition, it is also possible to produce effects as a result of accepting operations by a plurality of notification means, and when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, at least one notification means of the plurality of notification means It is possible not to perform the production. Moreover, the production | generation as a result of having received operation in one alerting | reporting means may be one. The plurality of notification means may include a device that does not produce an effect as a result of receiving an operation.

  Moreover, although the example which performs the detection based on the detection result of an operation means and the said detection result in a different control part was shown, you may perform the detection based on the detection result of an operation means and the said detection result in the same control part. Even when the operation unit is detected and the presentation based on the detection result is performed by different control units, the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position. The operation detection result is transmitted to another control unit, and the other control unit is configured to receive the detection result. On the other hand, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection is performed. Although the result is transmitted to another control unit, the other control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result.

  Further, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit or the second control unit, While the first control unit or the second control unit is configured to receive the detection result, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit. Alternatively, the data may be transmitted to the second control unit, but the first control unit or the second control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result. In addition, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit, and the operation unit is located at the second position. Or when the operation means is operated during operation, the detection result may be transmitted to the second control unit.

  The transmission destination of the operation detection result before, during and after the operation of the operation means may be the first control unit. Further, even when the operation unit is operated during operation, the operation detection result may be received by another control unit. In addition, when the operation means before the operation is operated, the operation detection result is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, and when the operation means is operated during and after the operation, from the second control unit. You may make it transmit the detection result of operation to a 1st control part. Further, before operation and during operation, the second control unit and after operation may be transmitted to the first control unit.

  In addition, if the operation means does not operate to the second position where it originally moves, the notifying means notifies the second position where it should have moved if the notification means performs notification that suggests the second position where it originally moved. The player may be notified, and there may be a case where a disadvantage is not given to the player as compared with the case of moving to the second position where the player originally moves. In addition, when the operating means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, if the notifying means performs notification that does not suggest the second position where it originally moves, the player may be confused due to a mismatch between the operating state and the notification mode. May be able to prevent. In this case, the notification that does not suggest the second position to move originally may notify the position of the operating means before the operation, or the notification that does not suggest the second position to move originally may be A position different from that after the operation may be notified.

  In addition, the operation unit may include a plurality of operation units (for example, a first operation unit and a second operation unit). For example, before the operation of the operation unit, the operation detection result of the first operation unit is displayed. Before the operation of the operation means, the detection result of the operation of the second operation unit is not accepted, and when the operation means moves to the second position where it originally moves, at least the operation of the second operation unit You may comprise so that a detection result may be received.

  In addition, if the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation means is not operating up to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is not obtained even if the first operation unit is operated. If it is not accepted, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, the second operation unit that can be originally operated can be operated, so that the same operation as when the operation means is moved to the second position where the operation means originally moves can be performed. There are cases where it can be prevented from being disadvantaged. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means is not operated up to the second position where it originally moves and the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received, the operation detection result is received when the first operation unit is operated. In such a case, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable, and may not notify that the first operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to operate because the first operation unit or the second operation unit may be operated. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable, You may alert | report only that the 2nd operation part can be operated by alerting | reporting means.

  In addition, when the operation means has not moved to the originally moved second position and the detection result of the second operation unit is not accepted, the operation detection result is accepted even if the first operation unit is operated. If not, the notification unit may notify that the second operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, there is a case in which the operation unit can be prevented from operating when the operation unit is not moved to the second position where the operation unit originally moves, and the operation unit can be prevented from being broken. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means is not operated to the second position where it originally moves and the detection result of the second operation unit is not received and the operation detection result is received by operating the first operation unit In addition, while notifying that the second operation unit is operable by the notification unit, it is not necessary to notify that the first operation unit is operable by the notification unit. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by changing the operation section that can be operated when the operating means is not moved to the original moving position. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable, You may alert | report only that the 2nd operation part can be operated by alerting | reporting means.

  Further, the operated means according to the present invention may be an operating means. In addition, when the operation means is not moved to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed, the effect means is adapted to respond to the operation means being operated. You may make it not perform an effect at least.

  In addition, when the operation means moved to the second position due to the movement control is operated, (1) detection means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the chance provided in the operation means) The button 750 detection unit and the bet button 132 detection unit) may detect that the pressing operation of the operation unit is detected. (2) After the time necessary for the movement control has elapsed, the operation unit is provided. The pressing operation of the operation means may be detected by the detection means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the chance button 750 detection unit, the bet button 132 detection unit).

  Further, the time required for the movement control may be a time required for moving from the first position to the second position, and may be a driving means (for example, driving units 708 (708a, 708b) provided in the operating means. ), The drive source 754d, and the drive unit 427) may be operated to rotate the rotating member from the restricted position to the permitted position. When the movable unit is driven up and down, the movable unit May be the time until the movement to the movement completion position.

  In addition, the case where the operation means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed means that (1) the operation means is due to a physical factor such as failure of the drive means or pressing by the player. It may be a case where the means cannot move, or (2) even if a time required for the movement control elapses, a case where the constant drive by the drive means is not possible. Further, it may not be detected whether or not the operating means has moved to the second position by the movement control.

  Further, it may be detected by the movement control that the operation means has been moved to the second position. In this case, it can be seen that the operating means could not move to the second position because it was not detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, it may be detected that the operating means cannot be moved to the second position by the movement control. In this case, since the operation means has been moved to the second position because it has not been detected, it is possible to produce an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect. Further, the special effect may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated even when the movement control is being executed.

  The movement control is performed over a first movement period, the first movement period is a period composed of a second period and a third period, and the special effect is the movement Even when the control is being executed, it may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated during the third period. The special effect may be configured not to be performed when the movement control is being performed and the operation means is operated during the second period.

  For example, when the movement control is started and finished in 1 second (an example of the first period), no special effect is performed even if the operating means is operated for 0.5 seconds after the start (an example of the second period) For 0.5 seconds (an example of the third period) from the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the start to the end, a special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated. Of course, when the movement control is started and ended in one second (an example of the movement control period), a special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated during this one second.

  Further, when the operation acceptance period ends with the operation means moved to the second position being not pressed, the operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In addition, when the operation acceptance period ends in a state where the operation means moved to the second position has not been pressed, the operation means may not be returned from the second position to the first position.

  Further, the operation means moved to the second position may be moved from the second position to the first position by movement control during the operation acceptance period. As for the means, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position during the operation reception period. Further, the operating means moved to the second position may be moved from the second position to the first position due to physical factors during the operation acceptance period.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the first operation means of the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the second operation of the plurality of operation means is performed. The means does not move, and when the notification means prompts the user to press the first operation means (in the case of (A) below), the first control is performed despite the movement control being performed. When the operating means has not moved to the second position, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means is detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the second operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected. Further, when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the third operation means and the fourth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means , When the notification for urging the operation of the third operation means is performed (hereinafter, in the case of (B)), the third operation means is moved to the second position despite the movement control being performed. If it does not move, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (B), when the third operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be. The pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of (B), when the third operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected. In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. The pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means , A notification for prompting the operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is performed) (hereinafter, in the case of (C)), the pressing operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is detected. If the fifth operating means is detected earlier than the sixth operating means (same as in the case of sixth detection> fifth detection), the detection result of the sixth operating means is not accepted. Alternatively, the detection result of the sixth operation means may be accepted after the detection processing of the fifth operation means is completed, or may be accepted when the pressing operation of the sixth operation means is detected. Good.

  In the case of (C), when the detection of the fifth operation means and the detection of the sixth operation means are almost simultaneous, the detection may be accepted at the same time, or both may not be accepted. Alternatively, after receiving the detection of the fifth (sixth) operating means, the sixth (fifth) operating means may be detected, or the fifth (sixth) operating means may be detected. If the detection is accepted, the detection result of the sixth (fifth) operation means may not be performed. Note that, at approximately the same time, one may be preferentially received. For example, priority may be given to detection of operation means that produces an advantageous effect for the player among the pressed operation means, or priority may be given to detection of predetermined operation means.

  In the case of (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operation means is detected, the sixth operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected. In the case of (C) above, when the pressing operation of the fifth operating means is detected, the sixth operating means may remain at the second position. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) and (C) above, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period, the movement control is performed. The third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of the movement may be almost the same for the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one of which moves first, during operation or when the operation ends. The other may be moved later.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after completion of the operation reception, the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth (sixth) ) May be stopped as it is at the second position. When the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Only one of the four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of the movement may be almost the same for the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one of which moves first, during operation or when the operation ends. The other may be moved later.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Only one of the four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position.

  The operation reception period indicates a period during which the result of detecting the pressing operation of the operation means is received. For example, when the operation reception period is 6 seconds, the detection result of the pressing operation of the operation means is received for 6 seconds after the operation reception is started, but the detection result of the operation means is not received after 6 seconds.

  Also, special effects can be executed when the operating means at the first position, the operating means moved to the second position by movement control, or the operating means moved to the third position by movement control is pressed. There may be. Note that the third position may be a position different from the first position and the second position.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A first movable body provided at a position where a player can contact;
A second movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact,
A game machine equipped with
When the first condition is satisfied, the first movable body is returned to the first position which is the origin position of the first movable body,
When the second condition is satisfied, the second movable body is returned to the second position which is the origin position of the second movable body,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first condition and the second condition are different.

(Appendix 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
A door that can be opened and closed;
Production control means for controlling the production of the game;
With
The production control means includes
First drive control means for controlling the first movable body;
Second drive control means for controlling the second movable body;
Have
The first movable body is provided at least on the door body,
The door body includes door opening detection means capable of detecting that the door body has been opened,
The first condition is that the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detection means,
The game machine characterized in that the second drive control means does not return the second movable body to the second position when the first condition is satisfied.

(Appendix 3)
In the game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
Power supply means for supplying power,
The first movable body moves to the first position at a first speed when power supply is started by the power supply means;
The gaming machine, wherein the first movable body moves to the first position at a second speed different from the first speed when the first condition is satisfied.

(Appendix 4)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
When the first movable object is movable and the first condition is satisfied, the first movable object is returned to the first position by the first drive control means. A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
When the supply of power is started by the power supply means, the second drive control means executes an initial operation process for moving the second movable body to a predetermined initial position,
The game machine characterized in that the initial operation process of the second drive control means is performed during the execution of the initial operation process of the first drive control means.

(Appendix A)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Production means capable of executing at least production,
Movement control means capable of executing at least movement control for moving the moved means;
A game machine equipped with
The operation means is moved from a first position to a second position when the movement control is performed by the movement control means.
The production means is capable of executing at least a special production when the operation means moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed,
Even when the operation means has not moved to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed, the effect means has at least the operation means according to the operation means being operated. A special production can be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The operation means may be replaced with a movable body (for example, the first movable body) provided at a position where the player can contact.

(Appendix B)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
Comprising an operation accepting means capable of accepting at least an operation by a player;
The operation means is provided in the operation reception means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C)
In the game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The special effect is not performed even if the operation means is operated during the execution of the movement control.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices A to C,
The effect means can execute at least an effect in response to the operation means being operated by a player even when the moved means is located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices A to D,
Informing means capable of at least notifying the user to operate the operating means,
The notification means performs the notification even when the operation means has not moved to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, and examples. You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

  Subsequently, an embodiment of the first invention will be described. In the following description, points different from the contents described so far will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In addition, constituent elements having the same names as the constituent element names described so far will be described with reference numerals used so far.

  FIG. 37 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the first invention, as seen from the front side (player side), with the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 opened.

  An outer frame 102 shown in FIG. 37 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. An inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 37 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The inner frame 104 corresponds to an example of a first door body, and the inner frame 104 is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the outer frame, and the game board faces the player side (front side). 200 is detachably mounted, and various control boards such as a main control unit 300 and sub control means (first sub control unit 400 and second sub control unit 500) are provided on the back side (rear side). Yes. The inner frame 104 is provided with an inner frame opening switch 145 (see FIG. 38) that detects the opening of the inner frame 104 when the inner frame 104 is opened. In this specification, the sensor may be referred to as a switch.

  The front door 105 is a door member attached to the front surface of the inner frame 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function. That is, the front door 105 corresponds to an example of a second door body, and is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the inner frame 104. The front door 105 shown in FIG. 37 is provided with a frame part 1051 and a dish part 1052. The frame portion 1051 is configured in a frame shape, and a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in an opening inside thereof, and a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, and a payout are provided on the front side. A display LED 142 and a door-side effect movable body (not shown here) are attached. The frame portion 1051 corresponds to the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. The dish unit 1052 includes an upper dish 126, a lower dish 128, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launching handle 134, and an operation panel 13P. The operation panel 13P is provided with various operation means such as a ball removal button 130 and a chance button 136. The chance button 136 includes a chance button lamp 138, and the chance button 136 also corresponds to an example of a door-side effect movable body. The door-side effect movable body referred to here corresponds to an example of a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact. The dish portion 1052 corresponds to the part of the door 108 with a ball storage tray shown in FIG.

  The inner frame 104 is provided with a front door opening switch 147 that detects opening of the front door 105 when the front door 105 is opened. The front door opening switch 147 is an opening detection means (sensor), and is in an off state when the front door 105 is not in contact. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the front door opening switch 147 in an off state. Thus, it is detected that the front door 105 is open.

  As described above, the inner frame 104 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 104. Further, the front door 105 can be opened and closed together with the inner frame 104 with respect to the outer frame 102. That is, when the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the front door 105 rotates together with the inner frame 104. Therefore, the combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104 can be viewed as one door body.

  Note that the frame portion 1051 and the plate portion 1052 may be separate door members, and may be independently rotatable with respect to the inner frame 104. In this case, a door opening switch for detecting the opening of each door member is provided on the inner frame 104. The frame portion 1051 may be an example of a second door body or door body, and the dish portion 1052 may be an example of a second door body or door body.

  FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 38, the diagonally left rear side is the player side (front side), and the diagonally right front side is the back side (rear side). FIG. 38 shows the front door 105, the transparent plate unit 118U, the game board unit 200U, the inner frame 104, and the outer frame 102 from the player side.

  The transparent plate unit 118U includes a transparent plate member 118 and an attachment member 1181 attached around the transparent plate member 118.

  The game board unit 200U includes a game board 200 and a control unit CU provided on the back side of the game board. The control unit CU includes a main board case, a first sub board case, a second sub board case, and the like.

  An inner frame opening switch 145 is provided at the lower corner of the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 38 on the side opposite to the hinge portion 112 toward the back side, that is, toward the outer frame 102. The inner frame opening switch 145 is an opening detection means, and is in an off state when not in contact with the outer frame 102. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the inner frame opening switch 145 to be in an off state. , Detecting that the inner frame 104 is open. A power board case 184, a payout board case 172, and a launch board case (not shown) are provided in the lower part of the inner frame 104 on the back side. Further, a power switch 178, a segment indicator 1044, and an error display LED 1045 are provided at the lower part of the inner frame 104 on the back side.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a state where the inner frame 104 or the front door 105 is open.

  FIG. 39A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 and the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 39 (a), the inner frame opening switch 145 is in the OFF state, and the front door opening switch 147 is also in the OFF state. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 has the inner frame 104 in the opened state. It is detected that the front door 105 is also open. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the open state of the two door bodies (104 and 105).

  FIG. 39B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 39B, the inner frame opening switch 145 is in the OFF state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the inner frame 104 is in the open state. On the other hand, the front door opening switch 147 is in the on state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 does not detect that the front door 105 is in the open state, that is, detects that it is in the closed state.

  FIG. 39C is a diagram showing a state where the inner frame 104 is closed with respect to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 is opened with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 39 (c), the inner frame opening switch 145 is in the on state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 does not detect that the inner frame 104 is in the opened state, that is, the front door 105 is Detect that it is closed. On the other hand, the front door opening switch 147 is in an off state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the front door 105 is in an open state.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 39 (b) and FIG. 39 (c) detects the open state of one door body (104 or 105).

  FIG. 39D is a diagram illustrating a state in which the inner frame 104 is closed with respect to the outer frame 102 and the front door 105 is also closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 39 (d), the inner frame opening switch 145 is turned on, and the front door opening switch 147 is also turned on. The CPU 304 of the main controller 300 has the inner frame 104 closed. It is detected that the front door 105 is also closed. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the closed state of the two door bodies (104 and 105).

  In FIG. 40, when the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102 but the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104, the power switch 178 is operated to turn on the power. It is a figure which shows an example of in steps.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40A, the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are both closed, and the power switch 178 is off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40B, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. The front door 105 rotates together with the inner frame 104 and remains closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In FIG. 40C, the hand is turned to the back side of the inner frame 104 in the open state, and the power switch 178 is turned on. That is, a power-on operation is performed. The power switch 178 is an operator that cannot be operated unless the inner frame 104 is opened. When the main power is turned on, the pachinko machine 100 starts the initial operation of the effect movable body 224. In this initial operation, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 confirms that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position. Even if not located, the effect movable body 224 is moved to the position farthest from the initial position (maximum operating position). When the effect movable body 224 reaches the maximum operating position, an initial position returning operation for returning the effect movable body 224 to the initial position is executed. A series of operations (confirmation operations) from the start of the initial operation to the return to the initial position corresponds to an example of the second operation. That is, the combination of the initial operation and the initial position return operation corresponds to an example of the second operation. Hereinafter, this combination is referred to as a confirmation operation.

  Here, the effect movable body 224 can reciprocate between the initial position and the maximum operating position, but the effect movable body 224 is not limited to the reciprocable operation, and the initial position is the starting point. It may be possible to operate via the maximum operating position (for example, to perform a circular motion).

  In the state where the inner frame 104 is opened, an error-related notification regarding the door opening error is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. However, the error-related notification may not be performed for a predetermined time after the power switch 178 is operated or until the initialization process (step S113) illustrated in FIG. 6 is completed.

  Each of the initial position and the maximum operating position is provided with a sensor that detects the effect movable body 224, and the second sub-control indicates that the effect movable body 224 has reached the maximum operating position or returned to the initial position. The CPU 504 of the unit 500 can detect it. When it is not possible to detect that the effect movable body 224 has reached the maximum operating position or returned to the initial position, an effect movable object error is notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. When the effect movable body error occurs, the effect movable body 224 itself may be broken, the sensor may be broken, or the wiring for transmitting the sensor detection signal may be broken.

  The first door-side effect movable body 2241a in the upper right shown in FIG. 40 (d) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position, and has completed the initial operation. Moreover, the 1st door side production | generation movable body 2241a shown in FIG.40 (e) has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position. That is, the initial position returning operation is completed.

  The second door-side effect movable body 2241b in the lower left shown in FIG. 40 (f) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. Moreover, the 2nd door side production | generation movable body 2241b shown in FIG.40 (g) has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position. That is, the initial position returning operation is completed.

  In this way, the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is performed. If there is a door-side effect movable body 2241 in addition to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, the confirmation operation is also performed for the other door-side effect movable body 2241. Is called. In addition, the plurality of door-side effect movable bodies 2241 may perform the confirmation operation at the same time. On the other hand, the door-side effect movable bodies 2241 having overlapping operation ranges may perform the confirmation operation by shifting the execution timing.

  41 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 40 in stages.

  When the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is completed, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed this time.

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 41 (h) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position, and has completed the initial operation. Also, the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 41 (i) has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position, and has completed the initial position returning operation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40 (j), the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed and in a closed state.

  If there is a board-side effect movable body 2242 in addition to the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 41, the confirmation operation is also performed for the other board-side effect movable body 2242. In addition, the plurality of board-side effect movable bodies 2242 may perform the confirmation operation at the same time. On the other hand, the board-side effect movable bodies 2242 whose operation ranges overlap may perform the confirmation operation with the execution timing shifted.

  Further, in this example, the confirmation operation is performed for the door-side effect movable body 2241 before the board-side effect movable body 2242, but it may be reversed or may be performed simultaneously. Alternatively, the execution timing may partially overlap.

  Here, the front door 105 is in a closed state, but the same applies to a state in which the front door 105 is opened together with the inner frame 104. Further, when the power supply in FIG. 40C is finished, the inner frame 104 is closed and the front door 105 is opened, or the front door 105 is also closed. It is.

  As described above, the confirmation operation (second operation) when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178 is executed regardless of the open / closed state of the door body.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where simultaneous power-on is performed by the island facility in stages.

  In the island facility, the power can be turned off all at once while the power switch 178 is on. When the power switch 178 is turned on and the power is turned off, the power can be turned on by the island facility without operating the power switch 178, that is, without opening the inner frame 104 (while being closed). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), when the power is turned on all at once by the island facility with both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 closed, it is the same as when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178. In addition, a confirmation operation is performed.

  The first door-side effect movable body 2241a in the upper right shown in FIG. 42 (b) rotates from the initial position toward the maximum operating position in a state where the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are both closed. Initial operation is continuing.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104. In addition, when the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the same as the following description. When the inner frame 104 is opened, an error-related notification regarding a door opening error is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. However, the error-related notification may not be performed until the initialization process (step S113) illustrated in FIG. 6 is completed.

  Even if the door is opened, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a continues the initial operation, and after the initial operation is completed, that is, after reaching the maximum operating position, as shown in FIG. In addition, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position, and has completed the initial position returning operation. Here, the operation in which the first door-side effect movable body 2241a returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position may be an initial position return operation in the confirmation operation, but an error triggered by the occurrence of a door opening error. It may be a dedicated operation in the generated state.

  The second door-side effect movable body 2241b in the lower left starts the checking operation even when the inner frame 104 is opened and the front door 105 is also opened, and the second door shown in FIG. The door-side effect movable body 2241b has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation.

  Here, the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104. On the other hand, the inner frame 104 remains open with respect to the outer frame 102. Thus, even when only the front door 105 is opened, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 provides an error-related notification regarding the door opening error. However, the error-related notification may not be performed until the initialization process (step S113) illustrated in FIG. 6 is completed.

  The second door-side effect movable body 2241b continues the confirmation operation, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 42 (e) returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position and completes the initial position returning operation. doing.

  Thus, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 are opened during the confirmation operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 performs the confirmation operation in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. continue. Even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 performs the initial operation in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. Continue and start the initial position return operation after the completion of the initial operation. Further, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial position returning operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is in the initial state in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. Continue the position return operation.

  When the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is completed, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed this time.

  Even when the front door 105 is also opened, the board-side effect movable body 2242 starts the confirmation operation, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 42 (f) reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position. And the initial operation has been completed.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 42 in stages.

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 43 (g) returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position and completes the initial position returning operation even when the inner frame 104 is open.

  As described above, even when the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is in the open state, the board-side effect movable body 2242 performs the confirmation operation in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. Run. Even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104, 105 ) Continues the verification operation as if it were closed. Further, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104, 105 As in the case of) being closed, the initial operation is continued, and the initial position returning operation is started after the completion of the initial operation. Even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial position returning operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104. , 105), the initial position returning operation is continued in the same manner as when closed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 43 (h), the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed and closed.

  Thus, the example shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 differs from the example shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 at least in the open / closed state of the inner frame 104, but the confirmation operation ( (Initial operation + initial position return operation) is executed. Note that the confirmation operation is performed in the same manner even when the open / close state of the front door 105 is different.

  Next, the opening of the door body during the production operation will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the inner frame 104 is opened during the rendering operation in stages.

  44 (a) to (f), the entire pachinko machine 100 is shown on the left side, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the board-side effect movable body 2242 of the pachinko machine shown on the left side are enlarged on the right side. (In the following figures, there are similar figures).

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 44 (a), both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are closed, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable. The bodies 2242 are all located at their initial positions. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. The board-side effect movable body 2242 is located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 44 (b), the big hit game is started, and the effect image of the first round is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side. Moreover, the 1st door side production movable body 2241a is operate | moving as a movable body production | presentation (1st production) during a big hit game period.

  The effect data of the movable body effect (first effect) during the jackpot game period in this example is (1) opening the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, and (2) the first door-side effect movable body 2241a. Is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is opened. (3) The second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is opened. Data (3) is repeated until the big hit game ends.

  The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 44B is rotated upward and opened in accordance with the effect data of (1) above.

  Even in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 44 (c), the first round of big hit game is continued, and the effect image of the first round is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side. . Further, according to the effect data of (2) above, the first door side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 44 (c) is closed and returned to the initial position, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward. Open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 44 (d), the second round of big hit game is started, and the effect image of the second round is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side. Further, according to the effect data of (3) above, the second door side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 44 (d) is closed and returned to the initial position, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a is directed upward again. Is turning.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (d) displays characters (door opening error) as a notification regarding a door opening error, and the speaker 120 also notifies the error occurrence notification sound (door) as a notification regarding the door opening error. Is open) is output. The front door 105 rotates with the inner frame 104 and remains closed with respect to the inner frame 104. However, even when the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the following Same as description.

  When the door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), the first door side effect movable body 2241a ignores the effect data and returns to the initial position. That is, an initial position returning operation is performed. This initial position return operation is not an operation according to the effect data. For example, even if the first door-side effect movable body 2241a operates (here, rotates) to the maximum operation commission position according to the effect data. If a door opening error occurs before reaching the maximum operating position, the operation toward the maximum operating commission position is canceled and the initial position is restored. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44E also displays characters (door opening error) as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also outputs an error notification sound. In the error occurrence notification from the speaker 120, “the door is open” and “please close the door” are alternately output repeatedly.

  Subsequently, the reserved villa production is started with the inner frame 104 opened. This reserved rendezvous effect is an effect of notifying (notifying) that there is a hit within the special figure start hold during the big hit game, and a notification (notice) image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is movable. Body production (second production) is also performed. The effect data of the movable body effect (second effect) here is: (a) the board side effect movable body 2242 is dropped to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and (b) the board side effect movable body 2242 is raised. It is data to be made.

  A notice image is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. In addition, although the character display which alert | reports a door opening error is also made | formed, this character display is difficult to visually recognize by the preview image compared with the time when the preview image is not displayed. Further, according to the effect data of (a), the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 44 (f) falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, making it difficult to visually recognize a part of the preview image. Combined with the preview image, the production effect is enhanced. In this example, when the inner frame 104 is in the open state, the door-side effect movable body 2241 cancels the effect operation and returns to the initial position, but the board-side effect movable body 2242 performs the effect operation according to the effect data. Run. The board-side effect movable body 2242 may also cancel the effect operation and return to the initial position.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 44 in stages.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 with the inner frame 104 opened as shown in FIG. 45 (g) displays the continuation of the preview image shown in FIG. 44 (f). As characters appear, “Congratulations” is displayed. In addition, although the character display as the alert | report regarding a door opening error is also made | formed, the character display regarding an error is also difficult to visually recognize here also by the notice image compared with the time when a notice image is non-displaying. In addition, a sound as a notification regarding the door opening error is continuously output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, according to the effect data of (b), the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 45 (g) is raised to the initial position.

  Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. The character display for notifying the door opening error disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (h), and instead, the character display of “determined hold continuous change” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. . A character is displayed as a notification image. Further, the content of the error-related notification that has been output from the speaker 120 has changed, and the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 45 (h) outputs a voice “the door is closed” (error release notification voice). . A combination of the error release notification and the error occurrence notification corresponds to an example of notification regarding the door opening error (error related notification). The sound output of the error cancellation notification from the speaker 120 continues for the first period (for example, 15 seconds). As described above, the speaker 120 corresponding to an example of the notifying unit is in a state where the inner frame 104 is closed and the front door 105 is also closed (first state), and the door opening error is related. The error related notification (corresponding to an example of notification) is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 100 with the inner frame 104 closed as shown in FIG. 45 (i), the third round of big hit game has started, and the decorative image display device 208 shown on the right side has a third round effect image. Is displayed. However, the production operation using the door-side production movable body 2241 has not been resumed, and the first door-side production movable body 2241a and the second door-side production movable body 2241b remain closed (while remaining in the initial position). ).

  After this, the round digest of the jackpot game is continued with the inner frame 104 closed, but the presentation operation using the door-side production movable body 2241 is not resumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The effect image of the end effect of the jackpot game is displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot game can be expected one more time thereafter.

  As described above, in this example, the door is closed and the error is released, but the effect of the door-side effect movable body 2241 until the big hit game ends, more strictly until the big hit game end effect ends. The operation is not started. In other words, the door-side production movable body 2241 should perform the production operation according to the production data (1) to (3) from the start to the end of the big hit game. That is, the operation period of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is from the start of the big hit game to the end, and the effect operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not resumed until the operation period ends.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing stepwise a first modification of the example shown in FIGS. 44 and 45.

  The state shown in FIG. 46 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 45 (g), and the reserved continuous play effect is displayed with the decorative frame display device 208 and the board-side effect movable body with the inner frame 104 opened. 2242.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 46 (b), the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed, and the state is the same as that shown in FIG. 45 (h). The character display related to the door opening error disappeared, and the speaker 120 has finished outputting the error occurrence notification sound and started the error release notification sound output.

  The state shown in FIG. 46 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 45 (i), and the third round is entered, but the sound output of the error release notification is continued. That is, the error has been canceled, but the error-related notification is continued.

  Eventually, the error-related notification ends. When this error-related notification ends, in this modified example, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 is resumed. That is, while the error is released, the rendering operation using the door-side rendering movable body 2241 is not resumed during a period when the error-related notification is not completed. In the pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 is closed and the error-related notification is also finished as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the production operation using the door-side production movable body 2241 is resumed and canceled (3) ) Has started to rotate upward of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a according to the effect data.

  In addition, instead of resuming from the production data canceled in the middle, it may be resumed by returning to the beginning of the production data, or a resume point is determined in advance and the production data of the resume point is always resumed. May be. Even if the error-related notification has not ended, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 may be resumed from the time when the error is released.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 46 (e), the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed and returned to the initial position according to the effect data of (2) above, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is moved forward. Rotate and open.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing stepwise a second modification of the example shown in FIGS. 44 and 45.

  In the following description, differences from the example shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 will be mainly described, and overlapping description will be omitted.

  Each state shown in FIGS. 47A to 47C is the same as each state shown in FIGS. 44B to 44D.

  When a door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a provided on the opposite side (opening end side) to the hinge portion 112 side (rotating shaft side) Ignoring the production data and returning to the initial position. On the other hand, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b provided on the hinge portion 112 side (rotating shaft side) continues the operation according to the effect data, and here the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is forward. The rotation has started. The same applies to the case where the front door 105 is also open to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 47 (e), the second door side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data of (3) above, but the first door side effect movable body 2241a remains stopped at the initial position. And no action is taken.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 47 (f), the second door side effect movable body 2241b rotates forward according to the effect data of (2) above, but the first door side effect movable body 2241a is It is still stopped at the initial position and no action is taken.

  FIG. 48 differs from the second modification shown in FIG. 47 in that a door opening error occurs and the effect movable body that continues the operation according to the effect data is replaced with the effect movable body for which the operation is prohibited. It is a figure which shows an example.

  Even if the door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a on the open end side continues the operation according to the effect data, and here the first door side The production movable body 2241a continues to rotate to the maximum operating position. On the other hand, the second door-side effect movable body 2241a on the hinge part 112 side (rotating shaft side) that has returned to the initial position in accordance with the effect data of (3) is prohibited from subsequent operations. The same applies to the case where the front door 105 is also open to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48 (b), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed according to the effect data of (2) above, but the second door-side effect movable body 2241b remains stopped at the initial position. And no action is taken.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 47 (c), the first door side effect movable body 2241a rotates upward according to the effect data of (3) above, but the second door side effect movable body 2241b is It is still stopped at the initial position and no action is taken.

  Here, when considered together with the example shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, when a door opening error occurs, at least one of the plurality of effect movable bodies (here, the door-side effect movable body 2241) is movable. The body may be restricted (prohibited) at the initial position, and the remaining effect movable bodies may continue the effect operation according to the effect data.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of the case where the door body is opened in a state where the effect movable body is located at a position shifted from the initial position by an external force.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 (a) is in a demo state with no game being performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 displays a demo screen. The title is displayed.

  In FIG. 49 (b), someone touches the first door-side effect movable body 2241a at the initial position, and as shown in FIG. 49 (c), lifts the first door-side effect movable body 2241a upward. Yes. Then, the inner frame 104 is opened by cheating while the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is lifted upward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, characters are displayed on the demo screen as a notification regarding the door opening error, and an error occurrence notification is also generated from the speaker 120 as a notification regarding the door opening error. Audio is output. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 49 (d) is at a position shifted from the initial position.

  When the door opening error occurs, the effect movable body (here, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) is not the effect operation, but when it is not in the initial position, as shown in FIG. The operation of returning the movable body (first door side effect movable body 2241a) to the initial position is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 (f), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is located at the initial position, and the inner frame 104 is also closed.

  When the effect movable body deviates from the initial position by an external force during the effect operation, the effect operation may be continued.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the inner frame 104 is opened during a presentation operation of a movable body different from what has been described so far as the door-side production movable body 2241.

  50 (a) to (c), the left end shows the entire pachinko machine 100, the middle shows an enlarged operation panel 13P of the pachinko machine shown on the left end, and the right end shows The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown at the left end is shown enlarged (the same applies to FIGS. 51 to 54).

  In this example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is a chance button 136. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 50 is an effect movable body that protrudes upward when the chance button effect is started. The chance button 136 protrudes to the maximum operating position. However, if the chance button 136 is pressed before reaching the maximum operating position, the chance button 136 returns to the initial position without reaching the maximum operating position.

  In FIG. 50A, a chance button effect is started. In this chance button effect, the user is prompted to press the chance button 136, and when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation reception period, a new effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50A, the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and a screen that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed. On this screen, an image of the chance button 136 is shown. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 50A is at the initial position, and the image of the chance button 136 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also an image of the chance button 136 at the initial position.

  When the chance button effect is started, the chance button 136 gradually protrudes upward from the initial position as time passes. The protrusion of the chance button 136 improves both the effect of prompting the operation and the effect of improving the interest.

  The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 50B protrudes upward from the initial position, reaches the maximum operating position, and is in the most protruded state. The image of the chance button 136 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50B is also the image of the chance button 136 in the most protruding state.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50C displays characters as a notification regarding a door opening error, and the speaker 120 also outputs an error notification sound as a notification regarding a door opening error. Even if a door opening error occurs, the chance button 136 that is one of the door-side effect movable bodies 2241 does not return to the initial position and remains in the most protruding state (the maximum operating position). This is because the chance button 136 protrudes upward, so that it does not cause danger to the player due to the opening of the door or failure of the pachinko machine. ing.

  51 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 50 in stages.

  In FIG. 51D, the player is about to press the chance button 136 in the most protruding state with the inner frame 104 opened.

  In FIG. 51E, the chance button 136 is pressed while the inner frame 104 is open, and the chance button 136 is returned to the initial position. Here, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 may return to the initial position according to the effect data, or return to the initial position by a force pressed by the player (pushing force). There may be. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (e), a new effect is started when the chance button 136 is pressed. That is, a character appears and a notice about the currently displayed symbol variation display is made. The new advance notice may be a pre-reading advance notice or the like for the design change display (hold) that is started after the currently executed design change display.

  Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (f), the character display notifying the door opening error disappears. Further, the content of the error-related notification output from the speaker 120 is changed, and the error cancellation notification voice “door closed” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Furthermore, the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a reach effect.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing stepwise modifications of the examples shown in FIGS.

  The state shown in FIG. 52 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 50 (c), the inner frame 104 is opened, and the notification regarding the door opening error is started by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120. . Until just before the inner frame 104 is opened, the chance button 136 is in the most protruding state. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the chance button 136 in the most protruding state is displayed as a screen prompting the user to press the chance button 136.

  In this modification, when a door opening error occurs, the chance button 136, which is one of the door-side effect movable bodies 2241, is returned to the initial position. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 52 (b) has returned to the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208, even if the door opening error occurs, the chance button effect continues, but in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (b), the image of the chance button 136 returned to the initial position is The image of the chance button 136 that is not displayed and is in the most protruding state remains displayed. As described above, since the chance button 136 protrudes upward, it should be unlikely to cause danger to the player due to the door opening or a pachinko machine failure. The chance button 136 is returned to the initial position. However, since the chance button effect continues, the effect of prompting the operation by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is maintained. The image display of the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be an image display in which the chance button 136 returns to the initial position in accordance with the actual state of the chance button 136.

  Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (c), the character display notifying the door opening error disappears. In addition, an error release notification sound is output from the speaker 120. In this modified example, even if the error is released, the chance button 136 remains in the initial position, and the operation is not started by releasing the error, but the operation is started by releasing the error, and the state before the occurrence of the error ( Here, the most protruding state) may be restored.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In this modification, the chance button 136 was not operated within the effective operation period.

  The pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 53D is closed is immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has elapsed, and the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Even though it was not operated inside, a normal notice has been started as a new production. That is, in the chance button effect in this modification, a new effect is forcibly created at the timing of the effective operation period, even if it is operated within the operation effective period, as well as when operated within. Be started. Regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated, a new effect may be started when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Alternatively, only when the chance button 136 is not operated, a new effect may be started when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Furthermore, a new effect may be started at an earlier timing of the timing when the operation valid period passes and the timing when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. In addition, based on the operation of the chance button 136, an effect execution lottery may be performed, and a new effect may be started only when winning. Or, even if the chance button 136 is operated, a new effect may not be started uniformly.

  Next, errors other than the door opening error will be described.

  FIG. 54 is a table summarizing main errors other than door opening errors.

  When an error occurs, an error occurs in the payout display LED 142 shown in FIG. 37 or the segment display 1044 or the error display LED 1045 provided in the lower part of the back side of the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 38 according to the type of error. A display notifying that this has been done is made. The segment indicator 1044 and the error display LED 1045 cannot be confirmed without opening the inner frame 104, but the payout display LED 142 can be confirmed without opening the inner frame 104. The “display” shown in the table of FIG. 54 means a 7-segment display displayed on the segment display 1044.

  In a state where no error has occurred, “0” is displayed on the segment display 1044, and the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 remain off.

  The lower tray full tank error is an error that occurs when the lower pan 128 shown in FIG. 37 is full. “1” is displayed on the segment display 1044, and the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 are turned off. For example, an error notification is made from the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. The lower plate full tank error is canceled when the ball discharge lever 132 is operated to remove the ball and the lower plate full sensor is turned off.

  The payout number shortage error is an error that occurs when the planned number of payouts has not been executed. “2” is displayed on the segment display 1044 and both the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 are lit. To do. Since the payout number deficiency error is a disadvantageous error for the player, the payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105 that can be confirmed by the player is turned on. This payout number shortage error is canceled by a successful retry.

  The payout number switch error painted in gray is an error when a connection abnormality of a switch (sensor) for detecting the payout number occurs, and the main board of the main control unit 300 is an irrelevant error. When this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped and “3” is displayed on the segment display 1044.

  Similarly, the illegal payout error painted in gray is an error when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch is counted) in a state where no payout request is generated. Even if this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped and “4” is displayed on the segment display 1044.

  Similarly, the payout excess error painted in gray is an error when it is detected that a payout exceeding the number of winning balls or the number of rented balls has been made. In other words, this is an error when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls actually paid out are detected with respect to the number of payout requests. Even if this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped and “5” is displayed on the segment display 1044.

  In any of these three types of payout errors, the error display LED 1045 is lit, but the payout display LED 142 remains off. The error notification from the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 is not performed, but may be performed. Each error is released by opening the inner frame 104 and operating an error release switch 168 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back side of the inner frame 104, or similarly provided on the back side of the inner frame 104. It is necessary to turn on the power (operation of the power switch 178) with the operation of the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 2). That is, these three types of payout errors are errors that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The state in which these three types of payout errors have occurred corresponds to an example of a second error state.

  The confirmation operation can be started even in a state where an error that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened is generated. Also, the production operation can be started.

  Note that the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a magnet sensor and a vibration sensor. A magnet sensor error when the magnet sensor detects a magnetic force and a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor detects vibration also cause an inner frame 104. It is an error that cannot be cleared without releasing. That is, to cancel the magnet sensor error, it is necessary to open the inner frame 104 and turn on the power (operation of the power switch 178) with the operation of the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 2). To cancel the error, it is necessary to open the inner frame 104 and turn on the power again by the power switch 178.

  The CR unit communication error is an error when a communication abnormality is detected from the pachinko machine 100 side in transmission / reception of signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit, and “6” is displayed on the segment display 1044. The main control communication error is an error when an operation confirmation signal is not returned to the main control unit 300 during transmission / reception of signals between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and the like, and “7” is displayed in the segment display 1044. Is displayed. The CR unit unconnected error is an error when the connection with the card unit cannot be confirmed on the pachinko machine 100 side, and “8” is displayed on the segment display 1044. In any of these three types of communication errors, the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 remain off. The error notification from the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 is not performed, but may be performed. The cancellation of each error is as shown in the table.

  Among the errors described above, the game cannot be continued, that is, the game is stopped due to the occurrence of the error (ball launch is impossible and symbol variation is stopped), and the game is resumed unless the error is released (ball launch and symbol variation start) The error that cannot be performed is only the magnet sensor error, and the period in which the magnet sensor error occurs (the period from when the error occurs until it is canceled) corresponds to an example of the second period. The door-side effect movable body 2241 returns to the initial position when the door body (104, 105) is opened while a magnet sensor error has occurred while performing the effect operation according to the effect data. On the other hand, a period in which a payout number switch error, an illegal payout error, a payout excess error, or a vibration sensor error occurs is a period during which a game can be continued, and corresponds to an example of a first period.

  Here, the error will be supplemented although there is a point overlapping with the above description.

  Lower pan full error is when the lower pan full sensor signal is turned on when a predetermined input port of the main board of the main control unit 300 reads on once by a timer interrupt (off to on). Is output to the unit 600.

  With regard to a payout device error, the payout number (count number of the payout number switch) is a payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor finishes driving for the number of payout requests (actually + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is less than the number, the occurrence of the dispensing device error is detected. When paying out one by one (retry processing), the error is cleared.

  The main control communication error is an error that occurs when an off state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected or when an on state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts. The command cannot be received from the board. However, if the number of payout requests remains, the payout is made up to that amount. When the on state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected, and when the off state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts, the error is released.

  The CR unit communication error is an error in the CR unit and the interface. This error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the loan request is generated. After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

  The CR unit unconnected error is also an error in the CR unit and the interface. This error occurs when the OFF state of the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is detected and continued for 16 ms when the CR unit unconnected error is in the released state. Note that this is an error that does not affect the suspension of lending (payment of prize balls). When the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and continued for 16 ms, the error is released. After the error is canceled, communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  Note that the CR unit connection signal and the CR unit READY signal include a CR unit lending request confirmation signal as signals transmitted in the order CR unit → interface → payout board. The CR unit connection signal is a VL signal (+ 18V power supply in the CR unit). The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal and transmits that the CR unit is being lent. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal, and the CR unit transmits a lending request and a lending instruction for 25 basic units.

  Signals transmitted in the order of payout board → interface → CR unit include a CR gaming machine rental completion signal and a CR gaming machine READY signal. The CR gaming machine lending completion signal is an EXS signal, and is a signal for transmitting the request approval and lending completion for 25 basic units to the CR unit. The CR gaming machine READY signal is a PRDY signal and is a signal for transmitting that a payout operation is possible to the CR unit.

  When the power is turned on, the PRDY signal is turned on, and the BRDY signal is turned on when the lending operation (the player presses the lending operation button) is turned on. Next, a lending request is made when the BRQ signal is turned ON. After confirming the lending request, lending is accepted when the payout CPU turns on the EXS signal. Thereafter, the BRQ signal is turned off and a rental instruction is issued. The payout control means performs 25 payout control and then turns off the EXS signal to complete the lending. If the BRQ signal is turned ON again while the BRDY signal is ON, the lending operation is repeated, and the BRDY signal is turned OFF when all the operations are completed.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where an error (hereinafter referred to as a second error) that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is canceled during the rendering operation occurs.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the second error has occurred during the rendering operation in a stepwise manner.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 55 (a), the game balls are stored in the upper plate 126 to the point where they are almost full. On the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100, combinations of decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 55, a payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105 is shown. The payout display LEDs 142 shown in the respective diagrams ((a) to (f)) of FIG. 55 remain off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 55 (b), the big hit game is started, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is opened, and the winning ball is paid out by entering the variable winning opening 234. But game balls are starting to accumulate. Moreover, the 1st door side production | generation movable body 2241a shown in FIG.55 (b) is rotated and opened to the upper direction according to production data.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 55 (c), more balls accumulate in the lower plate 128, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a closes according to the effect data, returns to the initial position, and the second door-side effect. The movable body 2241b is pivoted forward and opened.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 55 (d), the second round of jackpot game has started, and according to the effect data, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed, returned to the initial position, and the first door side. The effect movable body 2241a is turning upward again.

  Eventually, the lower pan 128 becomes full, and a lower pan full error (hereinafter referred to as a third error) occurs, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A prompt message is displayed.

  Even if the third error occurs, the big hit game is continued, and the movable body effect by the door side effect movable body 2241 is not stopped. In FIG. 55 (e), the first door side is performed according to the effect data. The effect movable body 2241a is closed and returned to the initial position, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward again and opened.

  Here, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated, the ball is pulled out from the lower plate 128, and the lower plate full tank error (third error) is canceled. In FIG. 55 (f), the third round of big hit game has started, the movable body effect by the door-side effect movable body 2241 continues, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data. Returning to the position, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is pivoted upward and opened.

  56 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 55 in stages.

  Also in FIG. 56G, according to the effect data, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward again and opened.

  In FIG. 56 (h), the jackpot game of the eighth round has started, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data, and the first door side effect movable. The body 2241a is pivoted upward and opened. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 56 (i), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotating forward according to the effect data.

  Note that a payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105 is also shown in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The payout display LEDs 142 shown in FIGS. 56 (g) to (i) remain unlit.

  Here, a payout number switch error, which is a second error, occurs. This payout number switch error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened. Even if the second error occurs, the big hit game is continued, and the movable body effect by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not stopped. In FIG. 56 (j), according to the effect data, the second door side The effect movable body 2241b is closed, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is rotating upward. Even if the second error occurs, the payout display LED 142 remains off, and no error-related notification is performed by the notification means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. Thus, depending on the type of error, the player may not be notified.

  In FIG. 56 (k), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is turning forward according to the effect data.

  Here, in order to operate the error release switch 168 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back side of the inner frame 104, the inner frame 104 is opened, and a door opening error (hereinafter referred to as a first error) occurs. To do. Even if the first error occurs, the payout display LED 142 remains off, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (k) displays a character as a notification regarding the first error. An error occurrence notification sound is also output from the speaker 120 as a notification regarding the first error. Here, two types of errors such as the second error (payout number switch error) and the first error (door opening error) overlap, but due to the occurrence of the first error, FIG. 56 (l) As shown, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b returns to the initial position ignoring the effect data. Further, the operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a that has returned to the initial position is restricted, and remains at the initial position.

  57 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 56 in stages.

  In FIG. 57 (m), since the big hit game of the 10th round is started and the inner frame 104 is opened (first error state), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is also the second door. The side effect movable body 2241b is also restricted in its operation and both remain in the initial position.

  In FIG. 57 (n), the hand is turned to the rear side of the opened inner frame 104, and the error release switch 168 is operated. Then, the second error (payout number switch error) is canceled. On the other hand, since the inner frame 104 is in the open state, the first error (door opening error) continues, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is also the second door-side effect in FIG. The operation of the movable body 2241b is also restricted, and both remain in the initial position.

  Next, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed, and the first error is also released. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (o), the character display notifying the door opening error disappears, and the speaker 120 outputs an error cancel notification sound. In this example, when the first error is released and the error-related notification ends, the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is resumed even before the end of the big hit game.

  58 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 57 in stages.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 (q), the 15th round jackpot game is started and a considerably large number of balls are stored in the lower plate 128. In addition, the movable body effect according to the effect data has been resumed, and in FIG. 58 (q), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is the front according to the effect data. Rotate again to open.
Thus, according to the effect data, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and returned to the initial position, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward and opened.

  Eventually, the lower pan 128 becomes full, and a lower pan full tank error (third error) occurs again. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Has been made. The third error generated here is not resolved until FIG. 59 (z), and the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display a character display that prompts the user to remove the ball. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (r), an effect image of the end result of the big hit game is also displayed, and it is notified that the game will shift to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. Furthermore, in the door side production | presentation movable bodies 2241a and 2241b shown in FIG.58 (r), the last movable body production according to production data is also performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (s), the last screen of the big hit game end effect is displayed. In this decorative symbol display device 208, one hold icon h11 indicating the hold of the special figure is displayed, but this hold icon h11 hides a part of the character display (error related notification) that prompts to remove the ball. The character display for prompting the ball removal is more difficult to visually recognize before the hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (t), the first variation display of the decorative symbol after the end of the big hit game is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In FIG. (V), we are in super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (v), the screen display of the super reach effect is made, but this screen display hides a part of the character display (error related notification) that prompts the user to remove the ball. Character display prompting removal is more difficult to see than before the screen display. Note that the entire error-related notification may be hidden by another display.

  59 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 58 step by step.

  In FIG. 59 (w), the lower plate full tank error (third error) has not been eliminated, and an error-related notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is hidden by the display and part of it is difficult to see.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (x), a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 59 (y), a big hit game is started. Even at this stage, the bottom full tank error (third error) has not been resolved. On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, the movable body production operation period according to the production data by the door side production movable body 2241 is entered. The operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not affected by the influence of an error that occurs before the operation period arrives and has not been resolved even at the start of the operation period. Here, it is the third error that is not inherently affected, but even if it is the first error that is inherently affected (door opening error), the error occurrence timing must be earlier than the operation start timing. Will not be affected. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 59 (y) is rotated upward and opened according to the effect data.

  Here, the third error has occurred first, but the rendering operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not affected when the second error has occurred first.

  Here, the ball discharge lever 132 is finally operated, the ball is pulled out from the lower plate 128, the lower plate full tank error (third error) is canceled, and the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. Error-related information disappears. In FIG. 59 (z), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward and opened according to the effect data.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating in a stepwise manner an example in which the operation according to the effect data of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is prohibited even when the error occurrence timing is before the operation start timing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened, and a door opening error (first error) occurs. In addition, even when the front door 105 is also opened to the inner frame 104, it is the same as the following description. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (b) is in a reach state, but the display screen displays characters as a notification regarding the first error, and the speaker 120 also displays the first message. As an error notification, an error occurrence notification sound is output.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60C, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Even at this stage, the inner frame 104 remains open, and the door opening error continues. On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, the operation period of the movable body production according to the production data by the door side production movable body 2241 is entered, but here, the first error that has occurred first is not solved. Therefore, the operation according to the production data of the door-side production movable body 2241 is prohibited from the beginning. In other words, the first sub-control unit 400 receives an error occurrence command or error resolution command from the main control unit 300 or a command including the content of error occurrence or error resolution. Even if the jackpot start command is received from the controller 300, if the error cancel command has not been received in the state where the error occurrence command has been received first, the first sub controller 400 causes the door-side effect movable body 2241. The control according to the production data is not started. As a result, the operation of both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 60 (d) is restricted, and both remain at the initial position.

  Next, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed, the first error is released, and the character display notifying the door opening error disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. From 120, an error cancel notification sound is output. In this example, when the first error is released and the error-related notification ends, the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is resumed even before the end of the big hit game. If no action is performed at the beginning, even if the error cancellation or error-related notification is completed, the operation may not be performed until the jackpot game is completed.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a case where power is cut off and power is restored instantaneously during the confirmation operation.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is in a state in which the main power is not turned on, and then the power is turned on all at once by the island facility.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61 (b), the confirmation operation is started, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (b) has a character display for notifying that an initialization process including a confirmation operation is being performed when the power is turned on. This character display is displayed until, for example, step S115 shown in FIG. 6 or the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 7 is started.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61 (c), the initial value returning operation is performed for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a as the confirmation operation, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is maximum from the initial position. It is turning towards the operating position.

  In FIG. 61 (d), a power interruption (power interruption) occurs. The timing at which the power interruption occurs may be a timing before the second door-side effect movable body 2241b reaches the maximum operating position by the initial operation, or may be a timing at which the second door-side effect movable body 2241b reaches the maximum operating position. The timing during the initial value returning operation may be used. As a result of the power interruption, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b that has been in the confirming operation stops its operation and remains open as shown in FIG. 61 (e).

  62 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 61 in stages.

  In this example, after power interruption occurs, power is restored instantaneously, that is, power is turned on again without simultaneous power-on by island facilities, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is the same as the character display in FIG. 61B, and the character display notifying that the process such as the initialization process is being performed. This character display is displayed regardless of whether or not the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 2) is operated, that is, whether or not the RAM is cleared. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 (f), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b whose operation has been stopped by the previous power interruption remains open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this example, since the backup of the first sub-control unit 400 is not performed at the time of power interruption, the first sub-control unit 400 of the recovered pachinko machine performs the confirmation operation just before the power interruption. I can't figure out what I was. Therefore, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the power recovery command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the confirmation operation from the beginning.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 (g), the confirmation operation is started again from the beginning, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. Note that the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is still open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 (h), the initial value returning operation is performed for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a as the confirmation operation, and the confirmation operation for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is completed. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 (i), the confirmation operation for the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed. Here, no matter where the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is stopped, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is temporarily moved to the maximum operating position by the initial operation and then returned to the initial position by the initial position returning operation. Accordingly, power is restored (power is turned on again), but the effect movable body is held in the state at the time of power interruption, and thus may move differently from the confirmation operation before power interruption.

  If the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is stopped at the maximum operating position, the initial operation is omitted if the second door-side effect movable body 2241b can be confirmed by the sensor provided at the maximum operating position. Only the initial position returning operation may be performed. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 may instruct the execution of the initial operation. In this case, the second sub-control unit 400 uses the sensor provided at the maximum operating position before the second door-side effect movable body 2241b moves. The door-side effect movable body 2241b is detected, and the initial operation is virtually not performed.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 performs backup at the time of power interruption, after the power recovery, the confirmation operation may be resumed from the middle of the confirmation operation interrupted by the power interruption. Further, when the door body (104, 105) is opened immediately after power recovery, the execution of the confirmation operation may be restricted (prohibited). In addition, not only at the time of power recovery, when the door (104, 105) is opened during the confirmation operation, the effect movable body may be returned to the initial value, or the operation may be stopped halfway. .

  Furthermore, when a power interruption occurs during a performance operation according to the performance data and power is restored, the same as described above may occur.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a modification of the board-side effect movable body 2242.

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 41 and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 operate in a planar manner, but the board-side effect movable body is arranged in the front-rear direction (player side and back side). (Direction)).

  FIG. 63A shows a shielding device 246 composed of a plurality of members (246a, 246b) that perform a planar motion, and a character accessory 247 that can perform at least a motion in the front-rear direction. The character accessory 247 is hidden behind the shielding device 246, and the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened to advance forward (player side). The initial position of the character accessory 247 is on the back side of the shielding device 246.

  FIG. 63 (1) shows the shielding device 246 in a state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. The character accessory 247 is located at the initial position, and the character accessory 247 is visible to the player. Absent.

  In FIG. 63 (2), each of the left door 246a and the right door 246b makes a full turn, and the character accessory 247 advances from the back. The advancement / retraction of the character accessory 247 is caused by a stepping motor and a rack and pinion mechanism 2471 (not shown).

  In FIG. 63 (3), the character accessory 247 has advanced beyond the shielding member 246 to the front side of the shielding member 246. The position of the character combination 247 shown in FIG. 63 (3) corresponds to the maximum operating position of the character combination 247.

  In the movable body effect, operations as shown in FIG. 63 (1) → FIG. 63 (2) → FIG. 63 (3) → FIG. 63 (2) → FIG. 63 (1) are possible. That is, the character accessory 247 can be moved back and forth, and can be reciprocated. Further, the shielding device 246 can also reciprocate. Further, both the shielding device 246 (XY direction movable effect means) and the character accessory 247 (Z axis direction movable effect means) can vibrate (fine reciprocating motion) on the way.

  Here, when the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 or only the front door 105 is opened, the movement may continue until the movement of the shielding device 246. The operation may be restricted depending on the possibility. Further, each movable body (246, 247) can be operated by a plurality of stepping controls (commands), and when a door opening error occurs, the movable body based on the control command currently being executed. It may be configured to continue up to an operation (a production operation or a confirmation operation) and restrict each reception operation based on the next command operation. Further, when the door opening error occurs at the timing when only the shielding device 246 and / or the character accessory 247 or only the character accessory 247 returns to the initial position by the effect operation, the effect that is being executed is performed as the operation to return to the initial position. The structure which continues operation | movement may be sufficient.

  In addition, with the content demonstrated above, you may interchange the matter which made object the 1st door side production movable body 2241a, and the matter which made the 2nd door side production movable body 2241b object. Furthermore, the matter for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is limited to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and may not be applied to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b. The matter for the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be limited to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b and not applied to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a. Good.

  In addition, the matter for the door-side effect movable body 2241 can be applied to the matter for the board-side effect movable body 2242 (corresponding to an example of a third movable body). For example, the confirmation operation may be continued while the production operation of the board-side production movable body 2242 is stopped by opening the front door 105. Alternatively, on the contrary, the confirmation operation of the board side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the effect operation may be continued. Even if the front door 105 is opened, the board-side effect movable body 2242 may continue the effect operation and the confirmation operation. If the front door 105 is closed, the board-side effect movable body 2242 has a low risk of touching the player. Further, with the shielding device 246 (XY direction movable effect means) described with reference to FIG. 63, the risk of touching the player is low even when the front door 105 is open. On the other hand, in the case of the character role 247 (Z-axis direction movable effect means) described with reference to FIG. 63, even if it is the board-side effect movable body 2242, there is a risk of touching the player if the front door 105 is open. Therefore, the operation may be restricted. Furthermore, regardless of the open / closed state of the front door 105, the effect operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped by opening the inner frame 104, while the confirmation operation may be continued. Alternatively, on the contrary, the confirmation operation of the board side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the effect operation may be continued. Furthermore, the production operation and the confirmation operation may be continued.

  Furthermore, a fourth movable body, a fifth movable body,... May be provided as the door-side production movable body 2241, and a fourth movable body, a fifth movable body,. May be provided.

  Further, the operation in which the production movable body returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position may be the initial position return operation in the confirmation operation, or may be a dedicated operation in an error occurrence state triggered by an error occurrence. Good. Furthermore, the operation of returning from the maximum operating position to the initial position may be only the target movable body or all other movable bodies.

  Also, if the error is resolved during the operation of returning to the initial position on the condition that an error has occurred, the production operation may be performed immediately, or the production operation may be restarted after the operation is completed. Good. Further, it may be configured to restrict the execution of the rendering operation until another condition (such as the end of various game states or the start of another game state) is established.

  In addition, the maximum operating position is a range where the movable body is actually operated at the time of production of the movable body or error notification. For example, when there is a play space provided outside the operational range of the movable body, the space Will also be the maximum operating position.

  Furthermore, although the initial operation has been described as an operation that operates up to the maximum operating position, it may not necessarily be the maximum operating position, for example, a detection sensor for a movable body that is different from the initial position and within the operating range. It may be an operation that operates to a position where is provided.

In the above explanation,
“A movable body (for example, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) provided at a position where the player can contact at least;
A plurality of doors that can be opened and closed at least;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of door bodies is a first door body (for example, the inner frame 104),
At least one of the plurality of door bodies is a second door body (for example, the front door 105),
The movable body is provided at least on the second door body,
The movable body can at least return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the movable body is in a position different from the first position (for example, FIG. 47 (e) first door side production movable body 2241a),
The first position is an initial position of the movable body,
The movable body is capable of performing at least a second operation when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least by opening the first door body,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least by opening the second door body,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the power is turned on,
The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position,
The movable body can return to the first position after continuing the initial operation when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the initial operation in the second operation. (For example, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 42C),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the operation of the movable body.

  In addition, in the case where the second door body provided with the movable body is configured to be rotatable with respect to the first door body, the first door body is not only opened but also the first door body is opened. Even if it does, the 2nd door will be in an open state. Therefore, the possibility that a person (player or store clerk) at the opening destination will be injured by the operation of the movable body is reduced, and the second door body as a game table comes into contact with other game tables and the movable body becomes The possibility of failure may also be reduced.

  Here, the initial operation may be an operation in which the movable body moves to a second position farthest from the first position. The second position may be a maximum movement position of the movable body. The movable body may be capable of reciprocating between the first position and the second position. The second door body may be provided closer to the player side (front side) than the first door body. Further, the second door body may have an opening / closing shaft provided closer to the player side (front side) than the opening / closing shaft of the first door body. The second door body may be provided on the player side (front side) with respect to the game board, and the first door body may hold the game board.

  The movable body can also be contacted by a store clerk. In addition, the movable body may be provided on both the door body and the object different from the door body (for example, provided across two).

  In addition, when the first condition is satisfied when the movable body is in a position different from the first position, the movable body returns to the first position and then moves to another position (for example, , The maximum operating position), or may return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position.

  In addition, when the second condition is satisfied, the movable body performs a second operation, and after the second operation, another operation (for example, an effect operation based on effect data) is continued. You may do.

  In addition, the conditions such as the first condition and the second condition are examples in which the conditions are satisfied, and may be conditions that are satisfied by another operation or the like. For example, the first condition is established when the first door body or the second door body is opened, but may be a condition established by an operation unrelated to the door body. The second condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. However, the second condition is satisfied by another operation such as operation of the error release switch, start of a predetermined gaming state, return from the demo state, or the like. May be. Furthermore, the second condition may be a condition that is also established by opening the door body (for example, when the door body is opened, power is automatically turned on).

  In addition, conditions such as the first condition and the second condition may not be satisfied even if the operation described in this specification is performed. In addition, in the operation of the movable body in the claims of this application and the embodiment, the content described as “can be performed” may include a case where it is not performed.

  In addition, the “position at which the player can contact at least” includes a position where the player comes into contact with nature, and a position where the player does not normally come in contact but may come into contact in some cases. “Returnable” includes that it can be returned normally, but may not be returned in some cases (hereinafter the same). “Executable” includes that it can be executed normally, but may not be executed in some cases (hereinafter the same). The first condition is normally satisfied when the door is opened, but may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the opening angle of the door is insufficient). . The second condition is normally satisfied when the power is turned on, but may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the voltage is insufficient even when the power is turned on).

Also,
“The movable body can at least return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation (for example, FIG. 44 (e)),
The first operation is an effect operation according to the effect data.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, priority may be given to the safety of a person or a game machine over a production operation.

  Here, the movable body may return to the first position immediately when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation, A part of the operation may be continued and then returned to the first position.

  The movable body further moves to another position (for example, the maximum operating position) after returning to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation. Or before returning to the first position, it may return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position).

Also,
“The movable body can return to the first position without continuing the first operation when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation. (For example, FIG. 44 (e)),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, priority may be given to the safety of a person or a game machine over a production operation.

Also,
“The movable body is intended to return at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the movable body is not in the first position due to an external force ( For example, FIG. 49 (e)),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, even when the position of the movable body is shifted due to an external force or the like, it can be returned to the original position when the door is opened.

  The external force mentioned here corresponds to a force received by contact of a player or the like, a force received from a tool such as a magnet, or the like.

  When the first condition is satisfied when the movable body is not in the first position due to an external force, the movable body returns to the first position and then returns to another position ( For example, it may move further to the maximum operating position) or return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position.

Further, “the movable body is at least returned to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation according to the production data,
Even when the movable body receives an external force during execution of the first operation and moves to a position different from the position according to the effect data, the movable body tries to continue the operation according to the effect data. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

Also,
“The movable body does not perform at least the first operation even when receiving an operation instruction related to the first operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied (for example, First door side effect movable body 2241a) shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when door opening is established first, safety may be given priority over performance.

  Note that the movable body does not perform the first operation even when it receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied, and further performs another operation. (For example, an effect operation based on different new effect data) may not be performed.

Also,
“The movable body may continue the first operation when receiving an operation instruction related to the first operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied.”
Also,
“When the movable body receives an operation instruction related to the second operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied, the movable body can execute at least the second operation (for example, FIG. 40). (D) 1st door side production movable body 2241a),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, even when the door opening is established first, the second operation may be given priority. For example, opening the door may cause the clerk to turn on the power while performing maintenance of the game area at the time of opening the hall, so the work efficiency on the hall side will not be reduced by prioritizing the second operation. . In addition, since the power is turned on intentionally, it may be better to give priority to the second operation. Furthermore, before opening the store, there is a low possibility that a player or the like is on the open side of the door body, so safety may be ensured.

  The movable body performs the second operation when receiving an operation instruction related to the second operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied, and after the second operation, Other operations (for example, the first operation) may also be executed.

  In addition, even when the movable body receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation until the first condition is satisfied and the first position is returned, the first operation is performed. The movable body may be capable of executing at least the first operation after returning to the first position.

  Further, the movable body returns to the first position when the first condition is satisfied and an operation instruction regarding the second operation is received until the movable body returns to the first position. Later, the second operation may be executed at least, or even if the second operation is returned to the first position, the second operation may not be performed.

  In addition, when the movable body receives an operation instruction related to the second operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied, priority is given to returning to the first position without performing the initial operation. You may do.

Also,
“The second door body is provided with at least a second movable body (for example, a second door-side effect movable body 2241b),
The second movable body is capable of continuing at least the third operation when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the third operation (for example, FIG. 47 (e)). The second door side production movable body 2241b) shown in FIG.
The third operation is a production operation according to the production data.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where only a predetermined movable body can perform a special operation.

  The second door body may be provided with a lamp, a speaker and the like in addition to the second movable body. The second movable body continues the third operation when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the third operation, and after the third operation, another operation ( For example, an effect operation based on different new effect data) may be continued.

In addition, “continuable” includes that it can be continued normally, but may not be continued in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied) the same).
Also,
“The second door body is configured to be at least rotatable with one end as a rotation axis (for example, the hinge 112),
The movable body (for example, the relationship between the movable body and the second movable body is reversed here, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b) is the second movable body (for example, the first door-side effect movable Body 2241a) is provided at a position closer to the pivot axis (FIG. 48),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a possibility that the movable body close to the rotation axis may come into contact with an adjacent game table (such as the open end side or the CR unit between the tables) depending on the door opening angle. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent a failure by restricting the rendering operation while the door is open.

  In addition, the second door body may be configured to be removable, with one end as a fulcrum, in addition to being rotatable.

  Further, the second movable body may be provided at a position closer to the rotation shaft than the movable body (FIG. 47). By doing this, the movable body on the open end side has a large amount of movement due to the door opening, so there is a high risk of contact with the player, etc., so it may be possible to ensure safety by returning to the initial position. .

  In addition, “rotatable” includes that it can normally rotate but may not be able to rotate in some cases (for example, when locked, etc.) ,the same).

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 37),
The first door body (for example, the inner frame 104) is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the outer frame (for example, the outer frame 102),
The second door body (for example, the front door 105) is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the first door body.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first door body may be provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the island facility or the second door body. The second door body may be provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame.

Here, “first detection means for detecting that the first door body has been opened;
Second detection means for detecting that the second door body has been opened;
With
The first detection means may be a detection means different from the second detection means, or is a detection means common to the second detection means.
A game stand characterized by that. It may be. That is, it may be detected by separate detection means, or the opening of any door may be detected by one detection means.

Also,
“Notification means (speaker 120) provided,
The notification means is a means capable of executing at least notification (for example, an error-related notification regarding a door opening error) when the first door is opened,
The notification means is means capable of executing at least notification (for example, an error-related notification regarding a door opening error) when the second door body is opened,
The notification unit is a unit that can continue the notification (for example, error release notification) at least for a first period (for example, 15 seconds) even after the first state is reached (for example, FIG. 45 (h)). ,
The first state is a state in which the first door body is closed,
In the first state, the second door body is also closed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the notification means can at least continue notification even after the first door is closed and the second door is also closed.

  According to this game stand, by giving priority to the first period that the door body was open, even if the door opening time is short, it may be possible to reliably notify, We can expect to contribute.

  The informing means is in a state where the second door body is closed even when the first door body is closed and the second door body is still open. The notification can be continued even when the first door remains open.

  In summary, the inner frame 104 corresponds to “first door body” as an example, and the front door 105 corresponds to “second door body” as an example. The “movable body” corresponds to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a or the second door-side effect movable body 2241b as an example. The “first position” corresponds to the initial position of the movable body as an example. The “first operation” corresponds to the production operation according to the production data as an example, and the “second operation” includes a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position. A certain confirmation operation corresponds as an example. The “first condition” corresponds to opening the first door or the second door as an example, and “second condition” includes operation of the power switch 178 or simultaneous power-on by island equipment. It corresponds as an example. The “second movable body” corresponds to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b or the first door-side effect movable body 2241a as an example. The “third operation” corresponds to an effect operation according to the effect data of the second movable body as an example. The “first state” corresponds to an example in which the first door body is closed and the second door body is also closed.

In the above explanation,
“A movable body (for example, a door-side effect movable body 2241) provided at a position where the player can contact at least;
At least a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, a combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104);
A game machine equipped with
The movable body is provided at least on the door body,
At least one of the plurality of error states is a first error state (for example, a door opening error has occurred),
At least one of the plurality of error states is a second error state (for example, a state where an error that cannot be canceled unless the door is opened),
The movable body is at least in the first position when a first condition (for example, occurrence of a door opening error) is established during execution of a first operation (for example, an operation in accordance with effect data). It is possible to go back and
The movable body is capable of continuing at least the first operation when a second condition (for example, occurrence of a payout number switch error) is satisfied during execution of the first operation. ,
The first position is an initial position of the movable body,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first error state occurs,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second error state occurs.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the operation of the movable body. In some cases, the operation of the movable body can be selected according to the importance of the error. Furthermore, returning to the initial position may contribute to prevention of failure of the movable body.

  The movable body can also be contacted by a store clerk. In addition, the movable body may be provided on both the door body and the object different from the door body (for example, provided across two).

  The door body may be removable as well as openable and closable.

  The movable body further moves to another position (for example, the maximum operating position) after returning to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation. Or before returning to the first position, it may return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position). In addition, when the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation, the movable body continues the first operation, and after the first operation, another operation (for example, The production operation based on different new production data) may be continued.

  In addition, the conditions such as the first condition and the second condition (the same applies to the third condition and the fourth condition described later) are examples in which the conditions are satisfied, and may be in other states or other conditions. It may be a condition that is established by the above-described operation or the like.

  In addition, conditions such as the first condition and the second condition may not be satisfied even if the operation described in this specification is performed. In addition, in the operation of the movable body in the claims of this application and the embodiment, the content described as “can be performed” may include a case where it is not performed.

  In addition, the “position at which the player can contact at least” includes a position where the player comes into contact with nature, and a position where the player does not normally come in contact but may come into contact in some cases. In addition, “openable / closable” includes that it can be opened / closed normally, but may not be opened / closed in some cases (for example, when locked) (hereinafter the same). . “Returnable” includes that it can be returned normally, but may not be returned in some cases (hereinafter the same). “Can continue” means that it can be continued normally, but may not continue in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied) ,the same).

  Here, examples of the error state include a state in which the door is open.

  Further, “the movable body is intended to return at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the movable body receives external force and is not in the first position. There may be a certain gaming machine (for example, FIG. 49 (e)).

  Further, the door body may be the inner frame 104 alone or the front door 105 alone. The movable body may be capable of reciprocating between the first position and a second position farthest from the first position. Here, the second position may be a maximum movement position of the movable body. The door body may be provided closer to the player (front side) than the game board, or may hold the game board.

Also,
“The movable body can execute at least a second operation (for example, a confirmation operation) when the third condition is satisfied,
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the power is turned on,
The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position,
The movable body (the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 42 (c)), when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the initial operation in the second operation, The initial operation is continued and then returned to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the initial operation when the power is turned on can give priority to the operation of the movable body even when the first condition is satisfied by the first error state.

  In addition, when the third condition is satisfied, the movable body performs the second operation, and after the second operation, another operation (for example, the three conditions are satisfied). Other dedicated operations) may also be performed. Furthermore, the requirements for establishing the third condition may include that the door body is opened and the power switch is operated, or that the door body is closed (the island facility without the door being opened). The power may be turned on all at once).

  Further, “can be executed” includes that it can be executed normally, but may not be executed in some cases (hereinafter the same). The third condition is normally satisfied when the power is turned on, but may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the voltage is insufficient even when the power is turned on). is there.

  Here, the second operation may be different from the operation performed before the power is turned off if the above three conditions are satisfied after the power is turned off. May be.

  The initial operation may be an operation in which the movable body moves to a second position (for example, a maximum operating position) farthest from the first position.

Also,
"The first error state is a state where the door body is at least open,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The period of the second error state (for example, the period in which the payout number switch error occurs) may include the first period,
The first period is a period in which the game can be continued at least.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The period in which the second error state is set (for example, the period in which the magnet sensor error occurs) may include the second period,
The second period is a period during which at least the game cannot be continued,
The second error state is an error state that can be canceled at least when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The fourth condition is a condition that can be satisfied by opening the door body as at least one condition (for example, operating the power switch 178 that cannot be operated without opening the door body). ,
The movable body can return at least to the first position when the fourth condition is satisfied while the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the movable body can be returned to the initial position giving priority to the safety of the gaming machine or the player.

  Note that the fourth condition may be a condition that is satisfied only by opening the door (for example, when the door is opened, power is automatically turned on again).

  Further, “can be released” includes that it can be released normally, but may not be released in some cases (hereinafter the same).

  Further, the fourth condition may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the opening angle of the door is insufficient) even when the door is opened.

  Here, the second error state may be releasable by operation of operating means (error release switch 168, ram clear switch 180) provided on the back side of the game table. In other words, the fourth condition may be a condition that satisfies the operation of the operating means as at least one condition. In other words, an error canceling operation means that can be operated at least by opening the door body is provided, and the fourth condition is a condition that is satisfied by operating the error canceling operation means as at least one condition. May be.

Also,
“The movable body does not start at least the first operation in the first error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 45 (f), etc.),
The movable body is capable of at least starting the first operation in the second error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 56 (i), etc.)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible not to restrict the effect of the movable body more than necessary by not starting the first operation only in the first error state.

  The movable body may not start an operation different from the first operation (for example, an operation that moves according to a player's operation) in the first error state. The second operation may be started in addition to the first operation in the second error state.

  In addition, “being able to start” means that it should start normally, but may not start in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied) ( same as below).

Also,
“The movable body is capable of at least starting the second operation in the first error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 42),
The movable body is capable of at least starting the second operation in the second error state.
A game stand that specializes in that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the operation at the time of power-on may be given the highest priority.

  The movable body may be capable of starting an operation different from the second operation in the first error state (for example, an operation that moves according to a player's operation). In the second error state, the first operation may be started in addition to the second operation.

Also,
“The first operation is an operation according to the production data.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In summary, the door-side effect movable body 2241 corresponds to the “movable body” as an example. The “door body” corresponds to, for example, a combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104. The “first error state” corresponds to the state where the inner frame 104 is opened as an example, and the “second error state” includes an error that cannot be cleared unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The state corresponds as an example. The “first position” corresponds to the initial position of the movable body as an example. The “first operation” corresponds to an operation according to the production data as an example, and the “second operation” includes a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position. A certain confirmation operation corresponds as an example. As a result, the opening of the inner frame 104 corresponds to “first condition” as an example, and the “second condition” corresponds to an error occurrence that cannot be canceled without opening the inner frame 104 as an example. The “third condition” corresponds to, for example, the operation of the power switch 178 or the simultaneous power-on by the island facility, and the “fourth condition” corresponds to the opening of the inner frame 104 as an example.

In the above description,
“Production movable means [for example, door side production movable bodies 2241a, 2241b];
A door [for example, the front door 105 described in paragraph 0493 or the like];
An inner frame [for example, inner frame 104 described in paragraph 0492 or the like];
A game machine equipped with
The door body is provided on the inner frame [for example, paragraph 0493],
The effect moving means is means provided on the door body,
Production operation by the production moving means (hereinafter referred to as “first production operation”) [For example, the first door-side production movable body 2241a is moved from the initial position shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (d). When the inner frame is opened during the execution of the rendition operation that repeats rotating upward and returning to the initial position [for example, the case shown in FIG. It is configured to return to the initial position of the movable means [for example, the closed position shown in FIG. 44 (a) etc.] [for example, paragraphs 0556 to 0557],
The first effect operation is an operation according to effect data of the effect moving means,
When the power is turned on, the effect moving means starts a series of operations from the start of an initial operation [e.g., an operation of moving to the maximum operating position] until returning to the initial position [e.g., described in paragraph 0192 and the like. The power-on operation performed and the confirmation operation described in paragraph 0515 etc.]
When the inner frame is opened during execution of the initial operation in the series of operations [for example, in the case of FIG. 42 (c)], the effect moving means is operated after the ongoing initial operation is continued. Configured to return to the initial position [eg, paragraph 0535],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
The inner frame is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame [for example, the outer frame 102] [for example, paragraph 0492],
The door body is provided to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame [for example, paragraph 0493],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The effect moving means is configured to be on the front side of the door [for example, FIG. 44, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The effect moving means is configured to be positioned in front of the initial position [for example, a player side] in the first effect operation [for example, paragraph 0554 and FIG. 44],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` Equipped with multiple types of production moving means
One movable means of the plurality of types of effect movable means is a first effect movable means,
One movable means of the plurality of types of effect movable means is second effect movable means [for example, a chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 50 to 53],
The effect moving means [for example, door side effect movable bodies 2241a, 2241b] are the first effect moving means,
The door body [for example, the front door 105] is provided with the second effect moving means [for example, paragraph 0593],
The second effect moving means is an effect operation by the second effect moving means (hereinafter referred to as “second effect operation”) [for example, the effect operation described in paragraph 0593 and FIGS. 51 (e), which may perform the production operation]
The second effect operation is an operation according to the effect data of the second effect moving means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[Notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, etc.]
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One type of notification among the plurality of types of notification is door opening notification,
The door opening notification is a notification indicating that the inner frame is in an open state [for example, a character display such as “door opening error” shown in FIG. 44 (d) to FIG. 44 (f), or “the door is open”. Voice output, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The series of operations means“ from a certain position [for example, the position of the effect moving means at the time when the power is turned on] to the maximum operating position of the effect moving means [for example, the first operation shown in FIG. Move to the position of the door-side effect movable body 2241a] [for example, the initial operation described in paragraph 0515] and return to the initial position from the maximum operating position [for example, the initial position returning operation described in paragraph 0515] ”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The door body can be opened together with the inner frame [for example, paragraph 0495],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A door [for example, front door 105],
Movable means [for example, the first door side production movable body 2241a or the second door side production movable body 2241b];
A game machine equipped with
The movable means is a means provided on the door body,
When the power is turned on, the movable means is configured to perform a series of operations [for example, an operation from an initial operation to an initial position return operation],
Even if the door is opened during the execution of the series of operations, the series of ongoing operations are configured to continue (for example, the example shown in FIG. 42).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
“The series of operations is an operation in which the movable unit moves away from the initial position of the movable unit [for example, a rotating operation toward the upper side of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. Action)] is an action configured to be performed first,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The series of operations is ended when an operation of returning to the initial position of the movable means by the movable means [for example, an initial position returning operation returning from the maximum operating position to the initial position shown in FIG. 42 (c)] is performed. Is the behavior configured in the
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“With an inner frame [for example, inner frame 104]
The door body is provided on the inner frame [for example, the front door 105],
When the inner frame is opened during the execution of the series of operations, the series of ongoing operations are continuously performed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 42].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The door body can be opened together with the inner frame.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"The movable means is configured to be on the front side of the door body,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“Notifying means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120]
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One type of notification among the plurality of types of notification is door opening notification,
The notification means is means capable of executing the door opening notification when the door is opened during the execution of the series of operations,
The door opening notification is a notification [for example, an error-related notification] indicating that the door body is in an open state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The series of operations is an operation from an initial operation to an initial position returning operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“First movable means [for example, first door side production movable body 2241a];
A second movable means [for example, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b];
With
The first movable means is the movable means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"Game board [for example, game board 200],
Third movable means [for example, a board-side effect movable body 2242];
With
The third movable means is a means provided in the game board,
The third movable unit is a unit that may perform an effect operation.
A game table characterized by
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix A)
Providing production means that can at least produce production,
The movable body is an operating means that can be operated at least by a player,
The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect when the operation means is operated,
The operation means returns at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the operation means is in a position different from the first position.
The effect means does not at least execute the effect even when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

  For example, in a slot machine or the like, there are cases where symbols constituting the winning combination are not aligned (a prize cannot be won) unless the operation method related to the stop order or the like matches a predetermined operation method. In this case, a period (assist time) for notifying the operation method on the side of the sub-control unit may be provided regardless of the main control unit. Giving this period is a privilege for a player, and the period may be extended by winning a predetermined role or winning a lottery. This extension (additional number of games) is also a bonus for the player. According to the gaming table described in Supplementary Note 1, when the door body is opened by an illegal act, there are cases where the illegal game can be prevented by restricting the effect related to the provision of the privilege.

(Appendix A)
Providing production means that can at least produce production,
The movable body is an operating means that can be operated at least by a player,
The effect means is capable of executing at least the effect when the operation means is operated in an effective period,
The operation means returns at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the operation means is in a position different from the first position.
The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect after the effective period ends,
The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect after the effective period ends even if the operation means is operated (without depending on the timing when the operation means is operated). Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-1)
Production moving means,
A door,
The inner frame,
A game machine equipped with
The door body is provided on the inner frame,
The effect moving means is means provided on the door body,
When the inner frame is opened during the performance operation by the effect moving means (hereinafter referred to as “first effect operation”), the effect moving means returns to the initial position of the effect moving means. Configured,
The first effect operation is an operation according to effect data of the effect moving means,
The effect moving means is a means capable of executing a series of operations from starting an initial operation to returning to the initial position when the power is turned on,
When the inner frame is opened during execution of the initial operation in the series of operations, the effect moving means is configured to return to the initial position after the ongoing initial operation is continued. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix R0-1,
The inner frame is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame,
The door body is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
A gaming machine according to appendix R0-1 or R0-2,
The production moving means is configured to be on the front side of the door body,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-3,
The effect moving means is configured to be positioned forward of the initial position in the first effect operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-4,
Equipped with multiple types of production moving means,
One movable means of the plurality of types of effect movable means is a first effect movable means,
One movable means of the plurality of types of effect movable means is a second effect movable means,
The effect moving means is the first effect moving means,
The door body is provided with the second effect moving means,
The second effect moving means is a means that may perform an effect operation (hereinafter referred to as “second effect operation”) by the second effect moving means,
The second effect operation is an operation according to the effect data of the second effect moving means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-5,
Providing a notification means,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One type of notification among the plurality of types of notification is door opening notification,
The door opening notification is a notification that tells that the inner frame is in an open state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-6,
The series of operations is “an operation that moves from a certain position to the maximum operating position of the effect moving means and returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-7,
The door body can be opened together with the inner frame.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, and examples. You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 105 Front door 106 Front frame door 112 Hinge part 120 Speaker 126 Upper plate 128 Lower plate 136 Chance button 138 Chance button lamp 208 Decorative design display device 2241 Door side production movable body 2241a First door Side production movable body 2241b Second door side production movable body 2242 Board side production movable body 300 Main control section 400 First sub control section 500 Second sub control section 600 Dispensing control section 609 Door opening sensor 700 Chance button

Claims (12)

A door,
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The movable means is a means provided on the door body,
When the power is turned on, the movable unit is configured to perform a series of operations,
Even if the door body is opened during the execution of the series of operations, the series of ongoing operations are continuously performed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The series of operations are operations configured such that an operation of moving away from the initial position of the movable means may be performed first by the movable means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The series of operations is an operation configured to end when an operation of returning to the initial position of the movable means is performed by the movable means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
With an inner frame,
The door body is provided on the inner frame,
When the inner frame is released during the execution of the series of operations, the series of ongoing operations are continuously performed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4,
The door body can be opened together with the inner frame.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The movable means is configured to be on the front side of the door body,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
Providing a notification means,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One type of notification among the plurality of types of notification is door opening notification,
The notification means is means capable of executing the door opening notification when the door is opened during the execution of the series of operations,
The door opening notification is a notification that tells that the door body is in an open state.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The series of operations is an operation from an initial operation to an initial position returning operation.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
A first movable means;
A second movable means;
With
The first movable means is the movable means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
Game board,
A third movable means;
With
The third movable means is a means provided in the game board,
The third movable unit is a unit that may perform an effect operation.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.